P O R T A B L E
M O B I L E
Q U A D - B A N D
P H O N E
User Manual
Please read this manual before operating your
phone, and keep it for future reference.
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Phone?
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:
®
®
Nuance , VSuite™, T9 Text Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc., or its
affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
®
ACCESS and NetFront™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and other countries.
®
The Bluetooth word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are registered
trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.
microSD™ and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.
®
Openwave is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc.
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Android Market, Gmail, Google Mail, Google Maps, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube
are trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.
©
Swype and the Swype logos are trademarks of Swype, Inc. 2010 Swype, Inc. All rights reserved.
®
®
DivX , DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license.
®
®
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium content.
®
®
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX videos.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
movies. To obtain your registration code, from the Home screen, locate the DivX VOD section (tap Applications > Settings > About phone >
Legal information > License settings > DivX® VOD > Register) in your device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to
complete your registration.
Open Source Software
Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under GNU General Public License (GPL), GNU Lesser General
Public License (LGPL), OpenSSL License, BSD License and other open source licenses. To obtain the source code covered under the open
source licenses, please visit:
.
Dynamic Noise Suppression from Audience
Your phone is equipped with an advanced voice processing chip that delivers clear mobile calls by suppressing background noise,
intermittent sounds (like a siren or nearby conversation), and echoes, allowing you to hear and be heard nearly anywhere.
How Does It Work?
Based on the intelligence of the human hearing system, the technology:
•
•
Captures, evaluates and distinguishes all the sound signals surrounding your phone, and the person you're speaking with.
Then isolates the primary voice in conversation and filters out the background noise - so the person you're calling hears only your voice, without
disturbing background noise.
•
Dynamically equalizes and adjusts voice volume to optimize your calling experience, so you can hear clearly and don't need to speak louder to overcome
surrounding noise.
The noise suppression technology is built-in and already enabled in your new mobile phone. So it's ready to provide unsurpassed voice
clarity with every call.
Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability,
EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED ON THE WARRANTY PAGE ENCLOSED WITH THE PRODUCT, THE
PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS", AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER
WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; THE DESIGN, CONDITION OR QUALITY OF THE PRODUCT; THE PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; THE
WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE
REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION
MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE
PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF
THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS.
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS, OR
YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.
Table of Contents
1
2
3
4
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Regulations for
5
Section 1: Getting Started
This section explains how to get started with your phone by
installing and charging the battery, installing the SIM card and
optional memory card, and setting up your voice mail.
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings, and may vary
from your phone, depending on the software version on your phone,
and any changes to the phone’s Settings.
Before using your phone for the first time, you’ll need to install
and charge the battery and install the SIM card. The SIM card is
loaded with your subscription details, such as your PIN, available
optional services, and many other features. If desired, you can
also install an SD card to store media for use with your phone.
Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual start with the
phone unlocked, at the Home screen.
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual displays may
vary, depending on the software version of your phone and any
changes to the phone’s Settings.
Understanding this User Manual
Special Text
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of your
phone. A robust index for features begins on page 269.
Throughout this manual, you’ll find text that is set apart from the
rest. These are intended to point out important information, share
quick methods for activating features, to define terms, and more.
The definitions for these methods are as follows:
Also included is important safety information that you should
know before using your phone. This information is available near
the back of the guide, beginning on page 239.
•
Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu, or
sub-menu.
This manual provides navigation instructions according to the
default display settings. If you select other settings, navigation
may be different.
•
•
Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods, or useful shortcuts.
Important: Points out important information about the current feature
that could affect performance.
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual
assume you are starting from the Home screen and using the
available keys.
•
Warning: Brings to your attention important information to prevent
loss of data or functionality, or even prevent damage to your phone.
Getting Started
6
Text Conventions
2. Place your fingernail in the opening and firmly “pop” the
cover off the device (similar to a soda can).
This manual provides condensed information about how to use
your phone. To make this possible, the following text conventions
are used to represent often-used steps:
➔
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of
selecting successive options in longer, or
repetitive, procedures.
Example: “From the Home screen, press
(
Menu
)
➔
Settings
➔
Wireless
and network
➔
Bluetooth settings.
Battery Cover
The battery, SIM card and SD card are installed under the
battery cover.
Release Latch
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery cover, make sure
the phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
the
Power off
key until the power-off image displays, then tap
.
To remove the battery cover:
1. Hold the device firmly and locate the cover release latch.
7
To replace the battery cover:
If available, you can remove the previous SIM and replace it with
the new ISIM card.
ᮣ
Position the battery cover over the battery compartment
and press down until you hear a click.
Installing and Removing the SIM card
To install the SIM card:
SIM Card Overview
1. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card socket until
the card clicks into place.
Important!: Before removing or replacing the SIM card, make sure the
phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
2. Make sure that the card’s gold contacts face into the
phone and that the upper-left angled corner of the card is
positioned as shown.
the
Power off
key until the power-off image displays, then tap
.
The SIM card is loaded with your subscription details such as
your telephone number, PIN, available optional services, and
many other features.
Important!: The SIM card and its information can be easily damaged by
scratching or bending, so be careful when handling, inserting, or
removing the card. Keep all SIM cards out of reach of small
children.
Correct
Some features on your device (such as Wi-Fi Calling) can be
unlocked by using a new ISIM (IP Multimedia Services Identity
Module) card. To use this new ISIM card, call or contact T-Mobile
customer service for more information.
Incorrect
This card contains the necessary information for identifying and
authenticating the user to the IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem).
Getting Started
8
To remove the SIM card:
3. Orient the card with the gold strips facing down.
1. Remove the battery cover.
4. Firmly press the card into the slot and make sure that it
catches with the push-click insertion. For more information
2. Carefully place your fingernail into the end of the SIM slot
and push the card slightly out.
3. Carefully slide the SIM card out of the SIM card socket.
Important!: Be sure to align the gold contact pins on the card with the
Note: If the card is not inserted correctly, the phone will not detect it and no
service will be available. If this happens, turn off the phone, remove
the card, and reinstall the card in the correct orientation.
phone’s contacts.
Installing the microSD Memory Card
Your phone supports an optional (external) microSD™ or
microSDHC™ memory card for storage of media such as music,
pictures, video and other files. The SD card is designed for use
with this mobile phone and other devices.
Incorrect
Note: microSD memory cards include capacities of up to 2GB.
microSDHC™ memory card types can range from 4GB to up to 32GB.
Note: This device supports up to a 32GB microSDHC memory card.
Since the device comes with 16GB of built-in memory, its maximum
total storage capacity is 48GB.
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Locate the microSD card slot on the inside of the phone.
Correct
9
Removing the microSD Memory Card
Removing the Battery
1. Remove the battery cover.
ᮣ
Grip the battery at the top end (3) and lift it up and out of
the battery compartment (4).
2. Firmly press the card into the slot and release it. The card
should pop partially out of the slot.
Installing Battery
3. Remove the card from the slot.
4. Replace the battery cover.
Battery
Before using your phone for the first time, install the battery and
charge it fully.
Important!: Before removing or replacing the battery, make sure the
phone is switched off. To turn the phone off, hold down
the
Power off
key until the power-off image displays, then tap
.
Installing the Battery
1. Slide the battery into the compartment (1) so that the tabs
on the end align with the slots at the bottom of the phone,
making sure the connectors align.
2. Gently press down to secure the battery (2).
Removing Battery
Getting Started
10
Charging the Battery
Note: Verify that the battery is installed prior to connecting the wall charger.
If both the wall charger is connected and the battery is not installed,
the handset will power cycle continuously and prevent proper
operation. Failure to unplug the wall charger before you remove the
battery, can cause the phone to become damaged.
Your phone is powered by a rechargeable Li-ion battery. A wall
charger, which is used for charging the battery, is included with
your phone. Use only approved batteries and chargers. Ask your
local Samsung dealer for further details.
Before using your phone for the first time, you must fully charge
the battery. A discharged battery recharges fully in approximately
4 hours.
Important!: It is recommended you fully charge the battery before using your
device for the first time.
1. Connect the USB cable to the charging head.
2. Locate the Charger/Accessory jack (1).
Charging Head
3. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/Accessory
jack (2).
4. Plug the charging head into a standard AC power outlet.
The device turns on with the screen locked and indicates
both its charge state and percent of charge.
Warning!: While the device is charging, if the touch screen does not function
due to an unstable power supply unplug the USB power adapter
from the power outlet or unplug the USB cable from the device.
USB Cable
Correct
Incorrect
11
Important!: If your handset has a touch screen display, please note that a
touch screen responds best to a light touch from the pad of your
finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using excessive force or a
metallic object when pressing on the touch screen may damage
the tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For more
Low Battery Indicator
When the battery level is low and only a few minutes of talk time
remain, a warning tone sounds and the “Low battery” message
repeats at regular intervals on the display. In this condition, your
phone conserves its remaining battery power, by dimming the
backlight.
Correct
When the battery level becomes too low, the phone automatically
turns off.
Incorrect
Note: This illustration displays both the correct and incorrect orientation for
connecting the charger. If the charger is incorrectly connected,
damage to the accessory port will occur therefore voiding the phone’s
warranty.
5. When charging is finished, first unplug the charger’s power
plug from the AC wall outlet, then disconnect the charger’s
connector from the phone.
Getting Started
12
•
Animated wallpapers use processing power, memory, and more power.
Change your Live Wallpaper to a non-animated Wallpaper gallery or
Gallery image.
Extending Your Battery Life
Active applications, light levels, Bluetooth usage, and GPS
functionality all act to drain your battery. The following is a list of
helpful tips that can help conserve your battery power:
Power Savings
•
•
•
•
Reduce your backlight on time.
Turn Bluetooth off when not in use.
Turn Wi-Fi off when not in use.
Active applications, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization,
Location consent, or the LCD Brightness functionality all act to
drain your battery.
Deactivate the GPS when not needed. Most applications using this
function will periodically query the GPS satellites for your current
location; each query drains your battery.
The Power Savings application was designed to quickly activate
(turn on), or deactivate (turn off) those functions or applications
that use the most battery power.
•
Do not wait until your battery is completely depleted before charging
your device. Repeating this process of a complete discharge and
recharge can over time reduce the storage capacity of any battery.
1. From the Home screen,
touch and hold an empty
area until the Add to Home
menu displays.
•
•
Turn off Automatic application sync.
Use the Power Savings Widget to deactivate hardware functions such
as Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, GPS, Synchronization, or LCD brightness setting.
2. Tap Widgets
➔
Power
•
Check the Battery use screen to review what features or functions
have been consuming your battery resources.
savings. The Power Control
shortcut is added to the
current screen.
•
•
Check the Running Services and close any unnecessary applications.
Use the Task Manager feature to end/shutdown background
applications that are still running. These minimized applications can,
over time, cause your device to “slow down”.
•
Turn off any streaming services after use (see Running Services).
13
3. Tap any of the icons on the Power Savings shortcut bar to
Switching the Device On or Off
activate/deactivate the feature.
If you have not already configured your device after an initial
firmware update, you will be prompted with a series of
configuration screens.
Note: A green bar displayed beneath the icon means the application is active
(turned on). The green bar is removed from beneath the icon when the
feature is deactivated (turned off).
Once the device has been configured, you will not be prompted
with these screens again.
Initial Device Configuration
1. Tap the on-screen Android icon to begin the setup process.
Important!: Before the initial configuration, you quickly access emergency
services by tapping Emergency call and using the on-screen
dialer.
2. Tap Skip to ignore the Wi-Fi connection setup process.
3. Select/deselect the desired Google location services and
1. Press and hold
until the device switches on.
tap Next
.
The device searches for your network and after finding it,
you can make or receive calls.
4. Configure the Date and Time settings and tap Next
.
Note: The display language is preset to English at the factory. To change the
language, use the Language menu. For more information, refer to
5. Press and hold
until the Phone options screen
2. Press and hold
until the Phone options screen
appears.
appears.
6. Tap Power off
(
) ➔ OK.
3. Tap Power Off
(
) ➔ OK.
Getting Started
14
Locking and Unlocking the Device
By default, the device screen locks when the backlight turns off.
Note: You can choose to configure lock settings to prevent unauthorized use
ᮣ
Place your finger on the screen and swipe the glass in any
of the directions shown unlock the device.
Creating a New Google Account
™
You should create a Google Account when you first use your
device in order to fully utilize the functionality. This account
provides access to several device features such as Gmail, Google
Maps, Google Search, and the Android Market applications.
Before you are able to access Google applications, you must
enter your account information. These applications sync between
your device and your online Google account.
To create a new Google Account from your phone:
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Market).
Create to begin.
2. Read the introduction and tap Next
➔
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to create a Google
Account.
– or –
If this is not the first time you are starting the phone, tap
➔
(Gmail).
Note: If you already have a Google account, you only need to sign in.
15
To create a new Google Account from the Web:
Retrieving your Google Account Password
1. From a computer, launch a Web browser and navigate to
A Google account password is required for Google applications. If
you misplace or forget your Google Account password, follow
these instructions to retrieve it:
.
2. On the main page, click Sign-in
➔
Create an account now.
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser and navigate
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to create your free account.
4. Look for an email from Google in the email box you
provided, and respond to the email to confirm and activate
your new account.
2. Click on the Can’t access your account? link.
3. Enter your full Gmail address and click Submit. Follow the
password recovery procedure.
Signing into Your Google Account
1. Launch an application that requires a Google account
(such as Android Market or Gmail).
Voice Mail
Setting Up Your Voice Mail
Your device automatically transfers all unanswered calls to
voicemail, even if your device is in use or turned off. As soon as
your battery is charged and the SIM card inserted, activate your
voicemail account.
2. Click Next
➔
Sign in.
3. Tap the Username and Password fields and enter your
information.
4. Tap Sign in. Your device communicates with the Google
Important!: Always use a password to protect against unauthorized access.
servers to confirm your information.
5. If prompted, create a new Gmail username by entering a
prefix for your @gmail.com email address.
Getting Started
16
For new users, follow the instructions below to set up voice mail:
Accessing Your Voice Mail From Another Phone
1. Dial your wireless phone number.
Note: Voicemail setup may be different depending on your network.
2. When you hear your voicemail greeting, press the asterisk
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold
key on the phone you are using.
the key until the device dials voice mail.
1
3. Enter your passcode.
You may be prompted to enter a password.
Visual Voicemail
2. Follow the tutorial to create a password, a greeting, and a
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a
voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want
without being limited to chronological order.
display name.
Accessing Your Voice Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap
Visual Voicemail ).
(Applications) ➔
You can access your Voice Mail by either pressing and holding
(
on the keypad, or by using the phone’s Application icon,
1
2. Read the on-screen information and tap Next. A list of the
then tapping the Voice Mail application. To access Voice Mail
voicemail messages displays.
using the menu:
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold
Important!: If this is your first time to ever access Visual Voicemail, you may
be prompted to enter a new PIN code and tap Next to activate
Visual Voicemail.
until the device dials voice mail.
1
1
Note: Touching and holding
will launch Visual voicemail if it is already
active on your device.
Note: You must subscribe to Visual Voicemail service to use this feature.
Charges may apply. Please contact your service provider for further
details.
2. When connected, follow the voice prompts from the voice
mail center.
3. Tap an on-screen voicemail message to play it back.
17
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from
the Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to
remove them from your phone.
Task Manager
Your device can run applications simultaneously, with some
applications running in the background.
• RAM, which displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear Memory for
either Level 1 or Level 2 (both Level memory locations).
Sometimes your device might seem to slow down over time, and
the biggest reason for this are background applications. These
are applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and
are still active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you
see which of these applications are still active in the background
but also easily lets you choose which applications are left
running and which are closed.
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used
space within the Random Access Memory (RAM), Program, and
External SD card.
• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.
Shutting Down an Currently Active Application
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Task Manager
(
).
Note: The larger the number of applications running on your phone, the
larger the energy drain on your battery.
2. From the Active applications tab, tap Exit to close selected
applications or tap Exit all to close all background running
applications.
Task Manger Overview
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Task Manager
(
).
– or –
Press and hold
then tap Task manager. This screen
contains the following tabs:
• Active applications display those currently active applications
running on your phone.
Getting Started
18
Section 2: Understanding Your Device
®
This section outlines key features of your phone. It also describes
the phone’s keys, screen and the icons that display when the
phone is in use.
•
•
Media streaming integration via Netflix
8 Megapixel Camera and Camcorder with autofocus, multi-shot and
digital zoom
®
•
2 Megapixel Front Facing camera and preloaded Qik application for
Features of Your Phone
Your phone is lightweight, easy-to-use and offers many
significant features. The following list outlines a few of the
features included in your phone.
Video Chat
•
•
•
MP3 Player with multitasking features
Over 250,000 Apps available to download from the Android Market™
®
Pre-loaded e-reader applications such as: Blio , Google Books™, and
•
•
Touch screen with virtual (on-screen) QWERTY keyboard
®
Zinio
High Speed Packet Access Plus (HSPA+) delivering data speeds faster
than the current 3G network technology.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Social Hub to integrate all of your favorite social networking sites.
®
Polaris Office for document viewing and editing
•
•
•
•
•
•
Android 2.3, Gingerbread Platform
®
®
Assisted GPS (TeleNav GPS Navigation and Google Navigation)
Webkit-based browser
Compatible with Adobe Flash technology
®
Wi-Fi Capability
16GB built-in memory (on-board)
USB Tethering-capable
Expandable memory slot - supports up to 32GB
Mobile Hotspot Capability
Bluetooth enabled
Full Integration of Google Mobile™ Services (Gmail, YouTube, Google
Maps, Google Voice Search)
®
Lookout Security (Security, Backup, Missing Device capabilities)
®
T-Mobile TV
•
Multiple Messaging Options: Text/Picture/Video Messaging, and Instant
Messaging with Windows Live Messenger, Google Talk™ and Yahoo!
Messenger
®
Slacker Radio
SWYPE™ text input technology
Google Video Chat via Google Talk
•
Corporate and Personal Email
19
•
•
•
•
Google Music™ (appears as the Music icon)
Compatibility with a new ISIM card
15 14 13 12
Wi-Fi Calling via the use of an ISIM card
11
10
1
2
3
Access to thousands of Movies and TV Shows with the Samsung Media
Hub
•
HD Video Player 720p)
– Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, WMV7/8, VP8, MP43
– Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI, and DivX
®
®
•
•
•
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium
content
®
9
Kies Air to wirelessly sync your PC with your phone via a Wi-Fi
connection
AllShare™ to share your media content across DLNA certified devices
Front View
The following illustrations show the main elements of your
phone:
8
7
4
The following list correlates to the illustrations.
1. Front Facing Camera allows you to take pictures while
facing the screen and allows you to video conference.
Note: Video recorded in Portrait mode is reversed during playback.
5
12
6
Understanding Your Device
20
2.
9. Display shows all the information needed to operate your
phone, such as the connection status, received signal
strength, phone battery level, and time.
Volume key allows you to adjust the ringer volume in
standby mode (with the phone open) or adjust the voice
When receiving an incoming call:
volume during a call.
•
Pressing the volume key down mutes the ring tone.
10. Power/End key ends a call or switches the phone off and
on. Press and hold for two seconds to turn off Silent mode,
Flight mode, or to turn the phone on or off.
3. microSD Card Slot (internal) allows you use a microSD card
to expand the memory of your phone.
4. Menu key displays a list of options available for the current
screen. From the Home screen it displays Add, Wallpaper,
Search, Notifications, Edit, and Settings options.
11. Headset jack allows you to connect a hands-free headset
so you can listen to music.
12.
during phone calls and allows other
Microphone is used
5. Home key displays the Home screen when pressed.
callers to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them.
It is also used to make voice note recordings.
6. USB Power/Accessory connector allows you to connect a
power cable or optional accessories such as a USB/data
cable.
13. Receiver allows you to hear the other caller and the
different ring tones or sounds offered by your phone.
7. Quick search is used to search the device for applications,
contact information, or searches the internet for
information.
14. Proximity Sensor detects how close an object is to the
surface of the screen. This is typically used to detect when
your face is pressed up against the screen, such as during
a phone call.
8. Back key redisplays the previous screen or clears entries.
–
While talking on the phone, the sensor detects talk activity and
locks the keypad to prevent accidental key presses.
21
15. Light Sensor lets you use the ambient light level to adjust
the screen brightness/contrast. This sensor decreases
screen brightness in dim light.
1. External speaker allows you to hear ringers, music, and
other sounds offered by your phone.
2. Flash is used to take photos in low-light conditions.
3. Camera lens is used to take photos.
Phone Display
Your phone’s display provides information about the phone’s
status, and is the interface to the features of your phone. The
display indicates your connection status, signal strength, battery
status and time. Icons display at the top of the phone when an
incoming call or message is received and also alerts you at a
specified time when an alarm was set. The screen also displays
notifications, and Application (or shortcut) bar with four icons:
Phone, Contacts, Messaging, and Applications.
•
In a bright light condition (outdoors), the sensors cause the device
to increase the brightness and contrast for better viewing.
•
In dim light conditions, the device increases the screen brightness
to compensate.
Back View of Your Phone
The following illustration shows the external elements of your
phone:
1
2
3
Understanding Your Device
22
Status Bar
Signal strength
Battery status
Time
The Status Bar shows information about the connection status,
signal strength, phone battery level, and time, and displays
notifications about incoming messages, calls and other actions.
Connection Status
Status Bar
This list identifies the icons you see on your phone’s display
screen:
Notification
area
Google search
Home Screen
Indicator Icons
Status
area
This list identifies the symbols you’ll see on your phone’s display
and Indicator area:
Shortcuts
Displays your current signal strength. The greater the
number of bars, the stronger the signal.
Indicates that the Flight Mode is active. You cannot
send or receive any calls or access online information.
Primary
Shortcuts
Indicates there is no signal available.
Display settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the for the
wallpaper, cube, brightness or backlight.
Displays when there is no SIM card in the phone.
Displays when there is a system error or alert.
Displays when a call is in progress.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(
23
Displays when a call is on hold.
Shows your current battery only has three percent
power remaining and will immediately shutdown.
Represented as a blinking icon.
Displays when you have missed an incoming call.
Displays when the speakerphone is on.
Displays when the microphone is muted.
Displays when connected to the EDGE network.
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the EDGE network.
Displays when connected to the 3G network. 3G
indicator is only seen when roaming.
Displays when Call forwarding is set to Always
Displays when your phone is communicating with
the 3G network. 3G indicator is only seen when
roaming.
Displays your current battery charge level. Icon
shown is fully charged.
Displays when connected to the HSPA+ network.
Displays your current battery is 100 percent charged.
This icon is followed by an audible beep.
Displays when your phone is communicating with the
HSPA+ network.
100%
Displays your battery is currently charging.
Displays when the phone is connected to a computer
using a supported USB cable connection.
Displays your current battery charge level is
very low.
Displays when there is a new text message.
Understanding Your Device
24
Displays when an outgoing text message has failed to
be delivered.
Displays when the Sound profile is set to Silent mode
and Vibrate is set to Always or Only in silent mode.
Displays when there is a new voicemail message.
Displays when data synchronization and application
sync is active and synchronization is in progress
for Gmail, Calendar, and Contacts.
Displays when there is a new visual voicemail
message.
Displays when Bluetooth technology is active and
enabled.
Displays in the notifications window when there is
a new Email message.
Displays when the Bluetooth technology is active
and communicating with an external device.
Displays in the notifications window when there is
a new Gmail message.
Displays when the an outbound file transfer is in
progress.
Displays when the time and date for a Calendar Event
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when an alarm is set.
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
Displays when Wi-Fi is configured for a direct
connection to another compatible device in the same
direct communication mode.
Displays when the phone is in Silent mode.
All sounds except media and alarms are silenced, and
Vibrate mode is set to Never or Only when not in silent
Displays when the Mobile AP Hotspot feature is active
and communicating. For more information, refer to
25
Displays when the USB Tethering feature is active and
Displays when the external SD card (internal
microSD) has been disconnected (unmounted) from
the phone and is now ready for either removal or
formatting.
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active.
Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi network
count against available rate plan minutes.
Displays when the contents of the microSD card are
being scanned.
Displays when the Wi-Fi calling feature is active and
you are using it with within your current active call.
Displays when the External SD card is being prepared
for mounting to the device. This is required for
communication with the External SD card.
Displays when there is an error in the use or 911
registration of the Wi-Fi Calling feature.
Displays when the phone’s microSD card has been
improperly removed.
Displays when your phone is connected to a PC using
Kies air.
Displays when the phone has detected an active USB
connection and is in a USB Debugging mode.
Displays when your phone is connected to a Digital
Living Network Alliance (DLNA) certified device using
the AllShare application.
Displays when Power saving mode is enabled.
Displays in the notifications window when a song is
currently playing.
Displays when the Power saving alert notification has
been activated. You are then prompted to view your
current battery level.
Displays when your phone’s GPS is on and
communicating.
For more details on configuring your phone’s settings, see
Understanding Your Device
26
Notification Bar
Note: The Notifications panel can also be opened on the Home screen by
pressing and then tapping Notifications
The Notification area indicates new message events (data sync
status, new messages, calendar events, call status, etc). You can
expand this area to provide more detailed information about the
current on-screen notification icons.
.
Clearing Notifications
1. Tap the status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel
1. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
2. Tap Clear. The notifications are cleared from the panel.
2. Tap a notification entry to open the associated
Accessing Additional Panel Functions
application (2).
In addition to notifications, this panel also provides quick and
ready access to five device functions. These can be quickly
activated or deactivated.
27
–
You can obtain images from either your Pictures folder, from any of the
available images within the device’s Wallpaper gallery, or from the
animated Live Wallpapers.
The following functions can either be activated (green) or
deactivated (white): Wi-Fi Bluetooth GPS Silent mode, or Auto
rotation
Function Keys
Your phone comes equipped with four main function keys that
,
,
,
.
Note: Wallpapers supports the following image types: JPEG, PNG, GIF, BMP,
and WBMP.
can be used on any screen: Home Menu, Back and Search.
,
•
•
Search
search for a key term both on the phone and online.
Notifications ) allows you to expand popup notifications area to
provide more detailed information about the current on-screen
notification icons.
(
) displays the Google Search box that you can use to
Home Key
The Home key (
) takes you back to your Home screen
(
(#4 of the 7 available screens).
ᮣ
Press and hold to launch the Recent apps/Task manager
Menu Key
The Menu key (
) activates an available menu function for the
current screen or application. When on the Home screen, the
following menu options are available:
•
Add
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, and Wallpapers.
Wallpaper ) lets you to customize the current screen’s
(
) adds one of the following functions to a selected screen:
•
(
wallpaper image by choosing from either Gallery, Live Wallpaper or
Wallpaper gallery).
Understanding Your Device
28
•
•
Edit
(
) allows you to add or
Search Key
remove extended screens from
your device. You can have up to
six extended screens (one Home
screen and six Extended
screens).
The Search key (
) displays the Google Search box that can
be used to search for either a key term both on the phone and
online. In some instances, this key opens a search box specific
only to the current application.
1. Press
– or –
to launch the Google Search box.
Settings
(
) provides quick
access to the device’s settings
menu.
Press
and tap
➔
.
2. From the on-screen keyboard, tap
launch the Google Voice Search function.
(top of screen) to
–
The Settings menu can also be
accessed by pressing and
then tapping
Settings
➔
.
Go to
Back Key
The Back key (
) returns you to the previously active screen.
Search
Field
Settings
If the on-screen keyboard is currently open, this key closes the
keyboard.
Search
Options
Search Results
29
Using Google Search
Using Additional Voice Search Functions
Use the Google Search box to manually search for a term on both
your device and on the Web.
For more information, refer to:
.
1. Press
to launch the Google Search box.
to select a search area:
From an open Voice Search dialog, speak the following words to
access additional features:
2. Tap
•
•
•
•
voice actions (such as: [your query]) allows you to search the web by
speaking the search parameters.
• All searches your device, the Web, and the Android Market for your
search term.
listen to [artist/song/album] allows you to begin listening to the
selected song on Slacker radio.
• Web searches for your term only on the Web using the Google
search engine.
send text to [recipient] [message] allows you to open the Messaging
screen.
• Apps searches for your term only within the Android Market.
• Contacts searches for your term only within your current Contacts
entries.
navigate to [address/city/business name] allows you to receive
directions via Google maps™. Use either an Address name, Business
name, business type, or other navigation information to get the desired
directions.
• Settings configures the items that are searched against. Example:
Web, Apps, Memo, etc.
3. Enter a search term and tap a match from the list of
suggestions, phone search results, or previously chosen
search matches. Once touched, the item opens in the
appropriate application.
•
•
call [name] allows you to open the phone dial and automatically
send email to [recipient] [subject] allows you to open your email
account and compose a new email message.
– or –
From the on-screen keyboard, taping Voice Search
(
)
lets you speak into your device's microphone to enter a
search term.
Understanding Your Device
30
•
map of [location] allows you to view a map of an area via Google
maps. Use either an Address name, Business name, zip code, or other
navigation information.
Home Screen
The Home screen is the starting point for using the applications
on your phone. There are initially seven available panels, each
populated with default shortcuts or applications. You can
customize each of these panels.
•
•
•
go to [website] allows you to navigate to any component of your
device.
note to self [message] allows you to search for a note save to your
Memo Pad.
Status Bar
directions to [location] using your current location, allows you to
receive directions to a selected destination.
Google search
bar/Widget
Notification
area
Home Screen
Status
area
Shortcuts
Primary
Shortcuts
31
•
Notification area displays those icons associated with end-user
notifications such as: email messages, calls (missed, call in progress),
new voicemail, upcoming event, USB connection, emails, and
Text/MMS messages.
Note: Both the status bar and primary shortcuts are visible across all
screens.
•
Google search is an on-screen Internet search engine powered by
Google™. Touch to access the Voice Search feature where you can
verbally enter a search term and initiate an online search.
–
These notifications appear at the top-left of the screen (within the
Status bar area) and display important user information.
–
This information can be accessed by either swiping down from the
–
Tap Voice Search
(
) to launch the Voice Search function from
>
within this Google widget.
Notifications
(
)].
•
•
Widgets are self-contained on-screen applications (not shortcuts).
These can be placed onto any of the available screens (Home or
extended).
•
•
•
Status area displays those icons associated with the status of the
device such as communication, coverage, Bluetooth, 4G/3G,
Wi-Fi communication, battery levels, GPS, etc.
Shortcuts are icons that launch available device applications such as
Camera, YouTube, Voicemail, Contacts, Phone, Email, Market, etc.
These function the same as shortcuts on your computer.
Home Screen is a customizable screen that provides information
about notifications and device status, and allows access to application
Widgets.
–
Although some may already be found on the Extended Home screens,
the majority can also be found within the Applications screens.
The Application screens can be accessed by tapping
Extended Home Screens extend beyond the current visible screen
width to provide more space for adding icons, widgets, and other
customization features.
–
–
There are six available extended screens (panels) each of which may
be populated with its own shortcuts or widgets. These screens share
the use of the three Primary Shortcuts.
The current screen is indicated at the bottom by a larger circle. Up to
seven (7) total screens are available.
(
Applications) from the Primary shortcuts area.
–
Shortcuts can be removed from a screen and added back any number
of times.
–
Understanding Your Device
32
•
Primary Shortcuts: are four shortcuts present throughout all of the
available screens and can be used to both navigate within the device
or launch any of the following functions:
–
–
–
–
Phone
Logs, Contacts, Favorites, and Groups).
Contacts ) launches the Contacts-related screens (Keypad,
Logs, Contacts, Favorites, and Groups).
Messaging ) launches the Messaging menu (create new
(
) launches the phone-related screen functions (Keypad,
Widget
(
Counter displays
the currently
active screen
(
messages or open an existing message string).
Applications/Home toggles functionality between the Home and
Application screens.
•
Tap
(Applications) to access the Application screens loaded
with every available local application.
•
While in the Applications screens, tap
return to the Home screen.
(Home) to easily
As you transition from screen to screen, the screen counter
(located at the bottom) displays the current panel number in a
circle.
33
•
Press and hold: Pressing relates to use of the hardware keys and
buttons to select or activate an item. For example: press the
Navigation key to scroll through a menu. Some buttons and keys
require you to press and hold them to activate a feature, for example,
you press the Lock key to lock and unlock the phone.
Screen Navigation
Using the touch screen display and the keys, you can navigate
the features of your phone and enter characters. The following
conventions are used in this manual to describe the navigation
action in the procedures.
•
•
•
•
Tap: Use a brief touch to select items on the display or to enter text on
the virtual QWERTY keyboard. For example: touch an Application icon
to open the application. A light touch works best.
Navigating Through the Screens
The following terms describe the most common hardware and
on-screen actions.
Touch and hold: Touch and hold an icon or key to open the available
options, or to access a pop-up menu. For example: press and hold
from the Home screen to access a menu of customization options.
Flick: Move your finger in lighter, quicker strokes than swiping. This
finger gesture is always used in a vertical motion, such as when
flicking through contacts or a message list.
Press and hold
Tap
Touch and hold
Swipe or slide: Quickly drag your finger vertically or horizontally
across the screen. This allows you to move the area of focus or to
scroll through a list. For example: slide your finger left or right on the
Home screen to scroll among the seven panels.
•
Drag: Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start
to move it. Do not release your finger until you have reached the target
position.
Understanding Your Device
34
•
•
Pinch: “Pinch” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom
out when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers inward to
zoom out.)
Swipe or slide
and Drag
Spread: “Spread” the screen using your thumb and forefinger to zoom
in when viewing a picture or a Web page. (Move fingers outward to
zoom in.)
Flick
Pinch (Zoom Out)
Rotate
Spread (Zoom In)
•
Rotate: Automatically change the screen orientation from portrait to
landscape by turning the device sideways. For example: rotate to
landscape orientation when entering text, to provide a larger keyboard,
or when viewing web content to minimize scrolling.
35
Motion Navigation and Activation: The phone comes equipped
with the ability to assign specific functions to certain phone
actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and
gyroscope.
Using Sub-Menus
Sub-menus are available from within most screen and
applications.
1. Press
phone screen.
2. Tap an option.
. A sub-menu displays at the bottom of the
Menu Navigation
You can tailor the phone’s range of functions to fit your needs
using both menus and applications. Menus, sub-menus, and
features are accessed by scrolling through the available
on-screen menus. Your phone defaults with seven home screens.
Navigating Through the Application Menus
There are four default Application Menus available. As you add
more applications from the Android Marketplace, more screens
are created to house these new apps.
1. Press
Application Menu displays.
To close the Applications screen, tap
2. Sweep the screen to access the other menus.
and then tap
(Applications). The first
Sub-Menu items
•
or press
.
3. Tap any of the on-screen icons to launch the associated
application.
Understanding Your Device
36
Using Context Menus
Accessing Recently-Used Applications
1. Press and hold
to open the recently-used
Context menus (also called pop-up menus) contain options that
apply to a specific item on the screen. They function similarly to
menu options that appear when you right click your mouse on
your desktop computer.
applications window.
Note: This recent applications screen also provides access to the Task
Manager
.
ᮣ
Touch and hold an item on-screen to open its context
menu.
2. A pop-up displays the six most recently used applications.
3. Tap an icon to open the recent application.
Applications
The Application menu provides quick access to the most
frequently used applications. Applications display on each of the
four panels on the Applications screens.
Context
Menu
The following table contains a description of each application
available via both the Primary shortcuts area and via the
Applications screens. If the application is already described in
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to
that particular section is provided. For information on navigating
through the Applications icons, see “Navigating Through the
Application Menus” on page 36.
37
Blio®
411 & More
Blio is an eReading application that presents eBooks just
like the printed version, in full color, and with all of the
features you’d want from an eReader.
Provides more than just single tap access to directory
assistance and other portals. Available categories
include: 411 Directory Assistance, Current Weather, and
more.
Bonus Apps
Accounts and sync
Once added to your Home screen, this Widget helps you
discover free T-Mobile services and apps that are
compatible with your phone.
Allows you to add applications and determine which
type of account information you want to synchronize
with your Contact list. For more information, refer to
AllShare
Books
Allows you to share your on-device media content
with other external devices using DLNA (Digital Living
Network Alliance) and built-in AllShare™ technology.
Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.
UseGoogleBooksto read over3 million ebookson thego.
Calculator
Launches the on-screen calculator application. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions;
addition,subtraction,multiplication,anddivision.Youcan
also use this as a scientific calculator.
Asphalt 6®
Provides access to a built-in HD racing video game.
Understanding Your Device
38
Calendar
Clock
Launches a calendar application that syncs to your
Facebook™, Google™, or Microsoft Exchange work
calendars.
Allows you to set an alarm, configure and view the
World clock, use a stopwatch, set a timer, or Desk clock.
The applications display in a tabular format and quickly
accessed with the touch of a finger.
For more information refer to Clocks on page 199.
Camera
Downloads
Launches the built-in 8.0 megapixel camera application
from where you can take a picture with either the front or
rear facing cameras.
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your
current downloaded files (Internet and Other).
Note: An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot
video since there is already 16GB of built-in storage.
Email
Provides access to both your Outlook (Exchange Server-
based) work email and Internet email accounts (such as
Gmail and Yahoo! Mail). For more information, refer to
In addition to taking photos, the built-in camera also
doubles as a camcorder that also allows you to record,
view, and send high definition videos.
Contacts
Thedefaultstoragelocationforsavingphone numbersto
your Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.
39
Files
IM
Lets you view supported image files and text files on
both your internal storage and microSD card. Organize
and store data, images, and more in your own personal
file folders. Files are stored to either the internal storage
or memory card in separate (user defined) folders.
Allows you to send and receive instant messages using
Windows Live Messenger, Google Talk, or Yahoo!
Messenger communities. For more information, refer to
Kies air
Allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with
your phone (as long as both are on the same Wi-Fi
network). You can now have real-time access of your
phone through your PC to view call logs, videos,
photos, bookmarks, IMs, and even send SMS
messages directly from your home computer.
Gallery
Displays a Gallery of camera images and video stored in
Gmail
Provides access to your Gmail account. Google Mail
(Gmail)isaweb-basedemailservice.Gmailisconfigured
when you first set up your phone. For more information,
Latitude
Lets you see your friends’ locations and share yours
with them. The application also lets you see your
friends’ locations on a map or in a list. It also lets you
send instant messages and emails, make phone calls,
and get directions to your friends’ locations.
Google Search
Provides an on-screen Internet search engine
Understanding Your Device
40
Lookout
Memo
Lookout™ provides mobile device-specific security
featuresthatarecoupledwithaminimalperformancehit.
Creates new text memos. For more information, refer to
Messaging
Maps
Provides access to text and multimedia messaging (SMS
Launches a Web-based dynamic map that helps you find
local businesses, locate friends, view maps and get
Mini Diary
Allows you to create a mini diary where you can add a
photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable
life event.
Market
Allows you to find and download free and for-purchase
applications on Android Market. For more information,
More for Me
Provides customized offers, discounts and deals right to
Media Hub
Provides you with a one stop shop for the hottest movie
and TV content. You can now rent or purchase your
favorite content and then watch it from the
convenience of anywhere. For more information, refer to
Music (Google Music)
Launches the built-in Google Music Player that allows
you to play music files that you have both downloaded
from Google Music and stored on your microSD card. For
41
Music
Netflix
®
Launches the built-in Music Player that allows you
to play music files that you have stored on your
microSD card. You can also create playlists. For more
Netflix isaserviceofferingonlinestreamingservicethat
allows you to watch TV Shows & Movies directly on your
My Account
News & Weather
Provides you with account specific information such as:
current status, Activity, Set Alerts, Bill Summary, Plan
Services, and FAQ’s Info. For more information, refer to
LaunchesaWeb-basednewsandweatherfeedbasedon
your current location. For more information, refer to
Photo Editor
My Device
Provides basic editing functions for pictures you have
taken on your phone. In addition to basic image tuning
such as brightness, contrast, and color, it also provides
Allows youtoconfiguredevice settings,viewPersonalize
your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or Wallpapers, View Quick
Navigation
Places
Launches a Web-based navigation application.
Displays company logos on a layer of Google Maps.
When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business
or person, find out more information about the business,
see coupons, public responses, and more. For more
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be
wrong, dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
Understanding Your Device
42
Polaris Office
Social Hub
®
Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office
compatible office suite. This application provides a
central place for managing your documents online or
Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your
communication needs from within a single-user
interface. E-mails, instant messaging, social network
contents, and calendar contents from all major service
providers are available. For more information, refer to
Pro Apps
T-Mobile Mall
Provides access to compatible productivity tools. For
Thisdownloadableapplicationprovidesaccesstoseveral
phone features and tunes. For more information, refer to
Settings
Accesses the device’s built-in Settings menu. For more
T-Mobile Name ID
Allowsyou tomodify the on-screen Caller IDinformation.
Slacker
T-Mobile TV
®
Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.
Allows you to watch live mobile TV on your phone. This
application is a subscription service. For more
43
Tags
TeleNav GPS
This application is used for organizing and sharing Near
Field Communication (NFC) tags. You can scan a tag by
turning on your device and placing it near the tag.
This driving aid provides both audible and visual
navigation instructions for GPS navigation. For more
Utility
Talk
Thisapplicationhousessomeofthemostcommonlyused
utility applications such as: Calculator, Memo, Minidiary,
Task, Videos, and Voice Recorder. For more information,
Launches a Web-based Google Talk application that
lets you chat with family and friends over the Internet for
Video Chat
Task
Allows you to record and share live videos on your device
with your friends, family, and your favorite social
Allows you to keep track of both your current and
upcoming tasks. You can also sync these tasks with
different accounts.
Videos
Task Manager
Launches your device’s built-in video application
that plays video files stored on your microSD card.
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running
on your phone, and to end running applications to extend
battery life.
Understanding Your Device
44
Visual Voicemail
Voice Talk
VisualVoicemailenablesuserstoviewalistofpeoplewho
left a voicemail message, and listen to the any message
they want without being limited to chronological order.
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition system
that allows you to initiate several common tasks without
having to touch the phone. Features include: Call, Text,
Web
Voice Command
Openthebrowsertostartsurfingtheweb. Thebrowseris
fully optimized and comes withadvancedfunctionality to
enhance the Internet browsing feature on your phone.
Allows you to use your voice to perform operations that
you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a
YouTube
Voice Recorder
Launches the YouTube webpage via the browser.
Allows you to record an audio file up to one minute long
and then immediately send it as a message. For more
Zinio Reader
®
Launches a digital magazine reader. Zinio has
Voice Search
transformed your favorite print magazines into digital
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition
software and initiates a Google search based on the
45
Adding and Deleting Screens
Customizing the Screens
You can customize the Home screens (panels) to display the
Widgets, Shortcuts, Folders, or Wallpapers. For example, one
screen could contain the Music Player shortcut and other forms
of media, while another screen might contain communication
apps such as Gmail.
Your phone comes with seven screens. You can delete these
screens and then add them back later.
Note: These screens can be deleted and re-arranged.
You can customize your Home screen by doing the following:
Important!: Your phone can only contain at most seven screens and at least
one screen.
•
•
•
•
•
Adding, Deleting, and Rearranging screens
Adding and Removing Shortcuts
Adding and Removing Widgets
Creating Folders
To delete a screen:
1. Press
then tap
➔
and
(Edit).
Changing the Background (Wallpapers)
2. Touch and hold, then
drag the undesired
screen down to the
Remove tab (
3. Press to return to
the main Home screen.
).
Understanding Your Device
46
To add a screen:
3. Press
and then tap Edit
➔
OK. The application pages
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(
Edit).
then appear at the top of the screen, the primary shortcuts
appear at the bottom, and you have the option to also
generate a new folder or page to house these application
shortcuts.
2. Tap the Add icon (
). The newly added screen appears
as the last page.
3. Press
to return to the main Home screen.
4. Scroll through the application pages at the top and locate
Rearranging the Screens
the desired application.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Edit).
5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon, then drag it over one of
2. Touch and hold a screen and then drag it into its new
location. Upper-left is screen position #1 and bottom-right
is screen last screen.
the four primary shortcuts to replace it.
•
The new primary shortcut displays at the bottom of the screen. The
previous primary shortcuts switches places with your selected icon.
Adding and Removing Primary Shortcuts
6. Press
and then tap Save
.
The device comes with four Primary shortcuts: Phone, Contacts,
Messaging, and Applications/Home. As long as the menu is
displayed in a Customizable grid, you can replace the Phone,
Contacts, and Messaging shortcuts with other applications so
you access the shortcuts that are most frequently used.
7. Tap
to return to the Home screen.
Managing Shortcuts
Note: To move a shortcut from one screen to another, you must carefully
touch and hold the shortcut and slowly drag it to the edge of the
screen. As the shortcut turns light blue, you can begin to move it to the
adjacent screen.
1. Press
and then tap
(Applications).
If this does not work, delete it from its current screen. Activate the new
screen and then add the selected shortcut.
2. Press
and then tap View Type
➔
Customizable grid.
47
To add a shortcut from the Applications screen:
1. Press to go to the
Home screen.
6. While still holding the on-screen icon, position it on the
current screen. Once complete, release the screen to lock
the shortcut into its new position.
2. Select a location (screen)
for your new shortcut by
scrolling across your
available screens until
you reach the desired
one.
To add a shortcut via the Add to Home screen:
1. Press
to go to the
Home screen.
2. Navigate to a screen
with an empty area.
3. Touch and hold an empty
3. Tap Applications
(
) to
area of the screen.
reveal all your current
4. From the Add to Home
available applications. By
default, applications are
displayed as an
screen window tap
Shortcuts
.
5. Scroll up or down the list
Alphabetical grid.
and tap a selection.
4. Scroll across the screens and locate your desired
application.
5. Touch and hold the on-screen icon. The new shortcut then
appears to hover over the current screen.
Understanding Your Device
48
To delete a shortcut:
4. Scroll left or right across the bottom of the screen and then
1. Press
to go to the Home screen.
tap an available Widget to place it on your current screen.
2. Touch and hold the desired shortcut. This unlocks it from
To remove a Widget:
its location on the current screen.
1. Touch and hold a Widget until it unlocks from the current
screen.
3. Drag the shortcut over the Remove tab (
) and release
it.
2. Drag the widget over the Remove tab (
) and release it.
•
•
As you place the Widget into the Trash, both items turn red.
Adding and Removing Widgets
This action doesn’t delete the Widget, it just removes it from the
current screen.
Widgets are self-contained applications that can be placed on
any screen. Unlike shortcuts, widgets appear as applications.
To place a widget onto a different screen:
To add a Widget:
1. Touch and hold the widget until it becomes transparent.
1. Press
to go to the
2. Slowly drag it past the edge of the screen until the
adjacent page appears highlighted and it then snaps onto
the new page.
Home screen.
2. Touch and hold an empty
area of the screen.
3. Drag the widget to its desired position on the new screen.
3. From the Add to Home
screen window tap
4. Repeat these steps to continue moving it to other screens.
Widgets. The available
widgets appear within a
scrollable area across
the bottom of the screen.
49
Creating and Managing a Folder
2. Drag the folder over the Remove tab (
) and release it.
Folders hold items that you want to organize and store together
on the workspace.
Managing Wallpapers
Wallpapers consist of either Gallery images (user taken), Live
wallpapers (animated backgrounds), or Wallpaper gallery (default
phone wallpapers).
To create a new on-screen folder:
1. Press
to go to the Home screen.
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
Note: Selecting animated Live wallpapers will require additional battery
power.
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Folders
.
4. Tap an available folder type and place it on the current
To change the current wallpaper:
screen.
1. Press
to go to the Home screen.
Renaming a folder
2. Touch and hold an empty area of the screen.
1. Tap the desired folder you want to rename. This opens its
contents on an on-screen popup window.
3. From the Add to Home screen window tap Wallpapers
.
4. Select a Wallpaper:
2. With the folder open, touch and hold the grey Folder title
bar (top of the Folder window) until the Rename folder
pop-up displays.
•
•
•
Tap Gallery to select from a user image stored in the camera image
gallery, crop the image, and tap Save
.
Tap Live wallpapers to select from a list of animated backgrounds,
once done tap Set wallpaper
.
3. Enter a new title for this folder and tap Yes
.
Tap Wallpaper gallery, scroll through the images, tap a wallpaper
image, then tap Set wallpaper
.
Deleting a folder
1. Touch and hold a desired folder. This unlocks it from its
location on the current screen.
Understanding Your Device
50
Section 3: Memory Card
Your device lets you use a microSD (SD) or microSDHC card
(also referred to as a memory card) to expand available memory
space. This secure digital card enables you to exchange images,
music, and data between SD-compatible devices. This section
addresses the features and options of your device’s SD
functionality. The device has a USB SD card mode.
SD card Overview
After mounting an SD card in the device you can use your
computer to access and manage the SD card.
Important!: If access to the external SD card is not available, download and
install the USB drivers.
•
•
microSD card storage: up to 2GB in size
SDHC card storage: up to 32GB in size
microSD Icon Indicators
The following icons show your microSD card connection status at
a glance:
Using the SD Card
There are several methods for using the SD card:
1. Connecting to your PC to store files (such as music, videos,
or other types of files and media).
• the contents of the microSD card are being
scanned.
2. To activate the camera, video, music player, and other
• the card is being prepared for use and for
mounting.
dependant media or applications.
Important!: Your device can support SDHC cards up to 32GB capacity.
• the card has been improperly removed.
51
3. Configure the phone for USB mass storage mode
Important!: DO NOT remove a microSD card while the device is accessing or
transferring files. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data.
Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD
card. Your data may become damaged or lost if the battery runs
out while you are using the microSD card.
connection.
•
Press
Wireless and network
PC
➔
and then tap
(
Settings
)
➔
➔
USB utilities
➔
Connect storage to
.
Mounting the SD Card
•
To store photos, music, videos, and other applications. You must
mount (install) the SD card prior to use. Mounting the SD card
establishes a USB connection with your computer.
4. Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable
to the computer.
5. Tap Connect USB storage. Both the phone and computer
display icons to show that the device is mounted. As soon
as the connection is established a drive letter is assigned
to the phone’s storage device.
Important!: You must enable USB storage to mount the SD card.
1. Press
Storage.
2. Tap Mount SD card
Connecting to the SD card
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
6. Later, tap Disconnect storage from PC to close the USB
connection between the phone and your computer.
2. Verify the card is properly mounted.
Memory Card
52
Unmounting the SD card
2. Press
Storage ➔ Unmount SD card
3. Tap Format SD card Format SD card
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
.
Unmounting the SD card prevents corruption and damage to the
SD card while removing it from the slot.
➔
➔
Erase everything
1. Press
Storage.
2. Tap Unmount SD card
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
to format the SD card. The SD card formats and erases all
the data stored on it.
.
Factory Data Reset
3. When the “SD card will be unmounted” message displays
and the Mount SD card now appears in the menu list,
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to
the factory default settings.
1. Press
Privacy
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
SD card Memory Status
2. Tap Factory data reset. This action erases all data from
your device except current system software and bundled
applications, or SD card files such as music or photos.
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Storage. The available memory displays under the Total
Note: This feature provides an option to format the internal USB storage, not
space and Available space headings.
the microSD card.
Erasing Files from the SD card
3. Tap Format USB storage to erase all data stored on the
You can erase files from the SD card using the phone.
device’s internal storage area.
4. Tap Reset phone
➔
Erase everything.
53
Section 4: Call Functions and Contacts List
This section describes features and functionality associated with
making or answering calls, and the Contacts list, which is used to
store contact information.
Note: When you activate the Auto redial option in the Call settings menu, the
phone automatically redials up to 10 times when the person does not
answer the call or is already on the phone, provided your call is not
sent to voice mail.
Displaying Your Phone Number
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔ About
Quick Dialing a Number from the Contacts List
phone
➔
Status. Your phone number displays in the My
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
phone number field.
2. Locate a contact from the list.
3. In a single motion, touch and slide your finger over the
number by going to the right. This action places a call to
the recipient.
Note: The phone’s Settings menu can also be activated by pressing
and then tapping
(Applications) ➔
(Settings).
Making a Call
You can store phone numbers that are regularly used to the SIM
card or to the phone’s memory. These entries are referred to as
the Contacts list
.
1. Press
and then tap
.
2. Enter the phone number and then tap
If you make a mistake while dialing, tap
.
ᮣ
to clear the
to clear the entire
last digit. Touch and hold
sequence.
Call Functions and Contacts List
54
2. Tap End to end the currently active call (2).
Ending a Call
Briefly tap
ᮣ
key to end the call.
Note: To redial a recent number, tap
at the end of the call or locate the
number from the Logs list, tap the entry and tap Call
.
If you exit the current call screen and return to the Home screen,
You are visually notified that you are still on an active call by the
green phone icon within the Status bar.
In Call Notification
Making Emergency Calls
Ending a Call from the Status Bar
If you do not have a SIM card installed the first time you turn on
the phone, the Insert SIM card to make calls message displays
and an animated tutorial shows you how to install the SIM card.
1. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
Without a SIM card, you can only make an emergency call with
the phone; normal cell phone service is not available.
55
Making an Emergency Call Without a SIM card installed
1. Tap Emergency call from the on-screen display to make an
emergency call.
5. Tap
to exit this calling mode. You may be prompted
2. Enter 9-1-1 and tap
. Complete your call. During
to exit your emergency call mode.
this type of call, you will have access to the Speaker mode,
Keypad, and End Call features.
Dialing Options
When you enter numbers on the
Keypad, you will see three
on-screen options.
From the keypad screen, use
one of the following options:
3. Tap
to exit this calling mode.
Making an Emergency Call With a SIM card installed
•
•
•
•
Call
number.
Delete
(
) to call the entered
1. Swipe the Lock screen and access the Home screen.
(
) to delete digits
2. Press
and then tap
.
from the current number.
Voice Mail ) to access
your Voice Mail service.
Text Message
3. Enter the emergency number (ex: 911) and then tap
(
.
4. Complete your call. During this type of call, you will have
access to the Speaker mode, Keypad, and End Call
features.
(
) to send
the current number a new text
message.
Call Functions and Contacts List
56
To view additional dialing options:
Tap
•
Touch and drag the Reject call with message tab upward and tap
a predefined rejection message or tap Create new message to
create a new custom outgoing response.
ᮣ
:
• Add to Contacts to add the current number to either a new or
existing Contacts entry.
Pressing the Volume down button mutes the ringer.
If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the
entry’s name is displayed. You may also see the caller’s phone
number, if available.
• Speed dial setting to access the Speed Dialing menu where you
can assign a speed dial location to a current Contacts entry.
• Send message to send the current caller a text message while still
maintaining the current call active.
• Add 3 sec pause to insert a two-second pause to enter a
3-second delay within a number string (the phone continues dialing
after 3seconds without any additional keys being pressed).
• Add wait to insert a hard pause within the number string (the
Touch and drag
phone waits for your input). A wait requires that any consecutive
upward to reject
numbers be manually sent by tapping Send
.
Touch and slide
with a message
right to answer
Answering a Call
When somebody calls you, the phone rings and displays the
incoming call image.
the call
Touch and slide
left to reject
the call
The caller's phone number, picture, or name if stored in Contacts
List, displays.
ᮣ
At the incoming call screen:
•
•
Touch and slide
Touch and slide
to the right to answer the call.
to the left to reject the call.
57
To assign multiple numbers as rejected via Contacts:
1. From the Home screen, tap Contacts).
Managing Reject Calls
(
This feature allows you to categorize both known and unknown
callers as rejected contacts. These Contacts are then added to
you Rejection list which can be managed for individual entries
from within the Contacts list or as a whole from the Call rejection
screen.
2. Locate an entry and tap it to open the Contact Overview
3. Touch and hold an entry from the screen and select Add to
blacklist. All phone numbers associated with this entry are
then added to the reject list.
1. From the Home screen, press
Settings) ➔ Call Call rejection.
and then tap
(
➔
2. Tap Auto reject mode to configure your automatic rejection
settings. Rejected calls are routed automatically to your
voicemail. Choose from:
To assign single numbers as rejected via Auto reject list:
1. From the Home screen, press
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Call
➔
Call rejection
➔
Auto reject list.
• Off: disables the automatic rejection feature. You must then
2. Tap
(Add) and either enter the phone number or
manually reject incoming phone calls.
select a Contact from your Logs or Contacts list.
3. Tap Save to complete the assignment.
Using Voice Command
This application allows you to use your voice to perform operations
that you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone
number, texting a message, playing music, etc.
• All numbers: enables the features for all known and unknown
numbers, including those contacts that are not assigned to the
rejection list.
• Auto reject numbers: automatically rejects all entries assigned to
the Reject list/Blacklist.
Adding numbers to the rejection list
Entries can be added to the list via either the Contacts menu or
via the Auto reject list menu. The Contacts menu option assigns
all numbers for an individual as rejected. The Auto reject list
allows to assign individual numbers.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Voice command).
2. Read the Samsung Disclaimer and tap Confirm to continue.
Call Functions and Contacts List 58
(Applications) ➔
(
(
3. Read the Vlingo Terms of Service then tap Agree to
Using Voice Talk
continue.
This is a voice recognition application used to activate a wide variety
of functions on your phone.
4. Read the information on
the How to use Samsung
voice screen, then tap
1. From the Home screen, tap
Voice talk).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Read the on-screen overview information and tap Next to
Confirm
.
continue.
5. Read the information on
3. Review the tutorial information and tap Next to continue.
the What can I say?
screen, then tap Finish
.
4. Read the information on
the What can I say?
6. At the Voice talk screen,
scroll across the screen
to view some of the
sample icons for
screen, then tap Done
.
5. When the Voice talk
windows displays you
can either tap an
on-screen icon and
follow the prompts.
– or –
assistance in using Voice
command.
– or –
Tap Tap & Speak to say what you would like to do.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
59
6. Tap Tap & Speak to say what you would like to do. Some
Pause Dialing
commands include:
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with
automated systems, such as voicemail or financial phone
numbers.
•
•
•
•
•
“Call John Doe”
“Call John Doe mobile,...”
“Text Katie Message Hey”
“Play music”
•
3 Second Pause automatically sends the next set of numbers after
a three-second pause. This is indicated in the number string as a
comma (
,).
“Directions to XXX”
•
Wait sends the next set of numbers only after tapping
. This is
Send
International Calls
indicated in the number string as a semicolon (
;).
1. From the Home screen, tap
and then touch and hold
1. From the Home screen, tap
and use the on-screen
ꢀ
until the device dials voice mail.
keypad to enter the phone number.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the country code, area
2. Press
and then tap Add 3 sec pause. This feature
code, and phone number.
adds an automatic three-second pause.
3. If you make a mistake, tap
once to delete a single
3. Use the keypad to enter the additional numbers that will be
digit.
dialed automatically after the second pause.
4. Touch and hold
5. Tap
to delete all digits.
Tip: You can create pauses longer than three seconds by entering multiple
.
3-sec pauses.
4. Tap
.
Call Functions and Contacts List
60
Wait Dialing
Redialing the Last Number
Inserting a Wait into your dialing
sequence means that the phone
waits until it hears a dial tone
before proceeding with the next
sequence of numbers.
The phone stores the numbers of the calls you’ve dialed,
received, or missed if the caller is identified.
To recall any of these numbers:
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap the Logs tab to display the list of recent calls.
1. From the Home screen,
3. Tap the name/number and tap
.
tap
and use the
on-screen keypad to
Speed Dialing
enter the phone number.
Once you have stored phone numbers from your Contacts List,
you can set up to 8 speed dial entries and then dial them easily
whenever you want, simply by touching the associated numeric
key.
2. Press
and then tap
Add wait. This feature
causes the phone to
require your acceptance
before sending the next set of entered digits.
3. Tap
.
4. Once prompted, tap
to dial the remaining digits.
Send
61
Setting Up Speed Dial Entries
Changing a Speed Dial Entry Order
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
Important!: Speed dial location #1 is reserved for Voicemail. No other
number can be assigned to this slot.
2. Press
and then tap Speed dial setting.
1. From the Home screen,
Important!: The number 1 is reserved for Voicemail and another number
cannot be assigned to this slot.
tap
.
2. Press
and then tap
3. Press
and then tap Change order.
Speed dial setting. The
Speed dial screen displays
a virtual keypad with the
numbers 1 through 9.
4. In a single motion, touch and drag an entry over another
location on the virtual keypad.
5. Tap Save to store the new assignment.
6. Press
to return to the previous screen.
3. Tap an unassigned
number. The Contacts
screen displays.
4. Tap a contact and select a
number to assign to the
speed dial location. The selected contact number/image is
displayed in the speed dial number box.
Call Functions and Contacts List
62
Removing a Speed Dial Entry
Wi-Fi Calling
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
Wi-Fi Calling is a free feature for T-Mobile customers using this
device with the new ISIM card. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent
solution for coverage issues in and around the home or wherever
cellular coverage is limited. Minutes used while connected to the
Wi-Fi network count against available rate plan minutes.
2. Press
and then tap Speed dial setting.
3. Touch and hold a existing on-screen speed dial location
and select Remove from the context menu.
– or –
The benefits of Wi-Fi Calling include the following:
•
Wi-Fi Calling provides a coverage option to improve upon your current
in-home coverage experience
Press
and then tap Remove. Tap an entry and select
Remove
.
•
Wi-Fi Calling works anywhere there is an open Wi-Fi signal available
4. Press
to return to the previous screen.
Important!: A new ISIM card must be installed within the device prior to using
this feature. Wi-Fi must first be active and communicating prior
to launching Wi-Fi Calling.
Making a Call Using Speed Dial
You can assign a short cut number to a phone number in the
Contacts List for speed dialing.
Activating Wi-Fi
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi settings
(Settings) ➔
2. Touch and hold a speed dial location (numbers 2-9, or 1 if
Wireless and network
➔
.
you are dialing voice mail) until the number begins to dial.
2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on. A checkmark displays to indicate
3. If you are not certain of the speed dial location, tap
activation.
➔
➔
Speed dial setting and tap a speed dial
number to view the assigned phone number.
63
3. Tap an available WAP (Wireless Access Point) from within
the Wi-Fi networks area of the page. Follow the on-screen
instructions to complete connection.
Activating Wi-Fi Calling
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the
status bar.
Wi-Fi Connected
•
If prompted with an on-screen “Did you know your phone can make
calls over Wi-Fi” popup, tap Learn and follow the remaining
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
on-screen instructions. Tap Next
2. Press and then tap
Wireless and network Wi-Fi Calling
3. If Missing 911 Address) displays in the Status Bar,
➔
and tap Done
.
➔
(Settings) ➔
Wi-Fi Communication Issue
➔
.
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
(
follow these steps to provide a 911 address for emergency
location:
Note: To avoid international data roaming fees when using Wi-Fi calling
when outside the United States, the Data Roaming feature on your
device must be turned off.
•
•
•
Log into my.t-mobile.com
.
Click on Your Profile and edit the Customer Information
.
Enter your emergency location information and complete the online
registration.
Note: With certain rate plans, minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi
network count against available rate plan minutes.
4. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
Wi-Fi Calling Settings
.
Call Functions and Contacts List
64
5. Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use
2. Confirm
(
Wi-Fi Calling Ready) displays in the Status
of the Wi-Fi Calling feature:
Bar.
• Wi-Fi Preferred: Wi-Fi network is preferred over cellular network
when making calls. Calling requires you to stay in the Wi-Fi range.
When Action
Then
• Wi-Fi Only: Wi-Fi network is required for making calls. Calling
requires you to stay in the Wi-Fi range.
Displays on the You are connected to the
screen status
bar.
T-Mobile network and can
make Wi-Fi calls.
• Cellular Preferred: The cellular network is preferred over a Wi-Fi
network when making calls.
Displays on the The feature is active and you
6. Tap OK to save the setting.
screen status
bar.
are using with within your
current active call.
7. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network. Tap Wi-Fi Calling to toggle off the
feature, then tap it again to reactivate the feature and
re-register your device with the T-Mobile Network.
Does not display You are charged normal calling
on the screen
status bar.
rate minutes. For more
8. Confirm
(Wi-Fi Calling Ready) displays in the Status
Bar.
Displays on the There is an error in the use or
screen status
bar.
911 registration of the Wi-Fi
Calling feature.
Launching Wi-Fi Calling
Note: Verify you are currently connected to a Wireless Access Point.
3. Use the phone Dialer, call log, or contacts list to make a
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the
call.
status bar.
4. Go to the dialer and make a call. Make sure
(Wi-Fi Calling in use) appears during the call.
65
Adjusting the Call Volume
In Call Options
Your phone provides a number of features that are available for
use during a call.
During a call, use the Volume keys on the left side of the phone,
to adjust the earpiece volume.
ᮣ
Press the Up volume key to increase the volume level and
the Down volume key to decrease the level.
– or –
During a call, press the Up Volume key on the side of the
Dials the
number
Place a call
on hold
device.
From the Home screen, you can also adjust the ring volume using
these keys.
Call
duration
Noise
Reduction
Placing a Call on Hold
Adds a
new call
Ends the
call
You can place the current call on hold whenever you want. If your
network supports this service, you can also make another call
while a call is in progress.
Activates or
Deactivates
Bluetooth
Headset
Activates or
Deactivates
speakerphone
Mutes or Unmutes
the call
To place a call on hold:
1. Tap Hold to place the current call on hold.
2. Tap Unhold to activate the call that is on hold.
Call Functions and Contacts List
66
To make a new call while a call is in progress:
1. Enter the new phone number that you wish to dial or look it
up in Call history.
Muting a Call
1. Tap
Mute
(Mute off) to turn mute on so the other caller
cannot hear you speaking.
Mute
2. Tap Add call to dial the second call.
2. Tap
(Mute on) to turn mute off and resume your
conversation.
3. Dial the new phone number and tap
.
Switching to Bluetooth Headset
To switch between the two calls:
1. Pair the target Bluetooth headset prior to your call.
ᮣ
Tap Swap.
The In call number turns gray and displays On hold. The
active call displays a green background behind the
number.
2. While on a call, switch to the Bluetooth headset instead of
speaker by tapping Headset
.
3. At the prompt, tap Turn on to enable Bluetooth if it is not
Turning the Speakerphone on and off
already activated.
While on a call, you can use your Speakerphone by following
these steps:
More In-call Options
During a call you can save the current caller’s information to the
Contacts list, or create a Memo.
Speaker
1. Tap
(Speaker off) to turn the speakerphone on.
Speaker
2. Tap
(Speaker on) to turn the speakerphone off.
Viewing the Contacts List
During a call you can look up a number in the Contacts list.
Tip: When the speaker is turned On, the color of the speaker is green. When
1. Press
2. Browse the Contacts list for the information you need.
3. Press to return to the active call.
and then tap Contacts.
the speaker is turned Off, the color of the speaker is gray.
67
Creating a Memo During a Call
Setting up a Multi-Party Call
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
During a call it may be necessary to record information (a Note).
1. Press
and then tap Memo.
2. Dial the number for the first participant and tap
.
2. Use the keyboard to enter the note then tap Save
.
3. Tap Add call, enter the second phone number and
•
If desired, press
before saving.
and select a new memo background color
tap
. The first caller is placed on hold.
4. Wait for the second caller to answer the incoming call and
tap Merge. The two calls are now joined into a multi-party
call and display in the order in which they were called.
Adjusting Noise Reduction
During a call it may be necessary to adjust the noise reduction
feature. Activating this feature can improve the quality of your
conversation by reducing ambient noise.
Important!: A maximum of two callers can be joined to a single multi-party
line. Additional callers participate in a new Multiparty session
and are held in conjunction with the previous multiparty call. You
can swap or place each multi-party call on hold.
1. Press
feature.
2. Press
the feature.
and then tap Noise reduction off to activate the
and then tap Noise reduction on to deactivate
Multi-Party calls
Making a Multi-Party Call
A multi-party call is a network service that allows up to six
people to participate in a multi-party or conference call.
For further details about subscribing to this service, contact
T-Mobile customer service.
Call Functions and Contacts List
68
Having a Private Conversation With One Participant
When you have two participants
in a multi-party session, it
might be necessary to place
one of those participants on
hold so that a private
Manage Conference
Call
Split Caller
End Call
conversation can be held with a
single caller. While you are in a
multi-party call:
3. Tap the participant to which you want to speak privately.
You can now talk privately to that person while the other
participants can continue to converse with each other. If
there is only one other participant, that person is placed on
hold.
1. Press
and then tap
Manage Conference Call
.
– or –
Tap the Manage
4. To return to the multi-party call, tap the Merge icon. All of
Conference Call image.
the multi-party call participants can now hear each other.
2. Tap
adjacent to
Dropping One Participant
the participants you would like to split from the current
multi-line call. The list displays the callers in the order they
were dialed.
1. Press
and then tap Manage Conference Call.
2. Tap End to the right of the number to drop.
The participant is disconnected and you can continue the
call with the other participant.
3. Tap
caller.
to end your conversation with the remaining
69
Call Waiting
4. Tap Swap again to switch back.
Logs Tab
The Logs tab is a list of the phone numbers (or Contacts entries)
for calls you placed, accepted, or missed. The Logs tab makes
redialing a number fast and easy. It is continually updated as your
device automatically adds new numbers to the beginning of the
list and removes the oldest entries from the bottom of the list.
You can answer an incoming call while you have a call in
progress, if this service is supported by the network and you
have previously set the Call waiting option to Activate.
You are notified of an incoming call by a call waiting tone. For
To answer a new call while you have a call in progress:
The Notification area of the Home screen (upper-left) displays
phone notifications, status, or alerts such as:
1. In a single motion, touch
and slide it to the right to
answer the new incoming call.
Displays when a call is in progress.
Displays when a call was missed.
2. Tap an option from the on-screen menu:
• Putting XX on hold to place the previous caller on hold while you
answer the new incoming call.
• Ending call with XXX to end the previous call and answer the new
call.
Note: The new caller appears at the top of the list. The previous caller is
placed on hold and appears at the bottom of the list.
3. Tap Swap to switch between the two calls. This places the
new caller on hold and activates the previous call.
Important!: The currently active call is displayed with a green background.
Call Functions and Contacts List
70
Accessing the Logs Tab
Accessing Logs from The Notifications Area
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Logs tab).
1. Locate
from the Notifications area of the Status bar.
Logs
2. Tap an entry to view available options.
2. Tap the Status bar to reveal the Notifications tab, and then
drag the tab to the bottom of the screen to open the
Notifications panel (1).
Note: The Logs tab only records calls that occur while the phone is turned
on. If a call is received while it is turned off, it will not be included in
your calling history.
3. Tap the Missed call entry to open the Logs screen (2).
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and
Contacts entry name (if the number is in your Contacts).
Indicates all outgoing calls made from your device.
Indicates any received calls that were answered.
Indicates any received calls that were rejected.
Indicates a missed call.
Tip: Press
and tap Notifications to open the panel.
This list provides easy access to redial an entry, or you can also
choose to access two types of history entry lists depending on
how they are touched.
71
Call Logs - Caller Overview
•
Tap a contact entry name or number to reveal the Call options screen:
• Call allows you to redial the entry by name or number.
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the
Call options (tap)
Call Log screen
selected entry.
• Time provides the time and date of the call and its duration.
• Create contact to save the number if it is not already in your
Contacts.
• Update existing to add the number to an existing Contacts entry.
Touch and hold an entry to display the entry-specific context menu:
• Call [Number] to redial the current phone number.
•
• Send message allows you to create a new text message to the
selected entry.
• Edit number before call to make alterations to the current phone
number prior to redial.
• Add to Contacts to save the number if it is not already in your
Contacts.
• View contact to view the information for the currently stored
Contacts entry.
• Send log info to send the Log entry information via text message.
• Add to blacklist to add the current phone number to an automatic
rejection list. Similar to a block list, the selected caller will be
blocked from making an incoming calls to your phone.
Entry-specific
context menu
(touch and hold)
• Delete to delete the entry from the Logs list.
Call Functions and Contacts List
72
Altering Numbers from the Logs List
Erasing the Logs List
If you need to make a call from the Logs screen and you need to
alter the number prior to dialing, you can add the appropriate
prefix by prepending the number.
You can delete either an individual call log entry or all current
entries from the Logs list.
To clear a single entry from the list:
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
.
Logs
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
.
Logs
2. Touch and hold an entry to access the entry-specific
2. Touch and hold an entry and select Delete
.
context menu.
To clear all entries from the list:
3. Tap Edit number before call
4. Edit the number using the on-screen keypad or delete
digits by pressing to erase the numbers.
5. Tap once the number has been changed.
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap Delete.
3. Tap Select all Delete OK
➔
.
Logs
➔
➔
.
73
Viewing Missed Calls from Lock Screen
When you are unable to answer
a call for any reason and your
screen is locked, the number of
missed calls are displayed on
the Lock screen immediately
after a call is missed.
To view a missed call
immediately:
1. Press
the screen.
to reactive
2. Touch and drag the
button (with the number
of missed calls on it) to
the right.The Logs tab is then displayed.
Call Functions and Contacts List
74
Section 5: Entering Text
Thissectiondescribeshowtoselectthedesiredtextinputmethod
when entering characters into your phone. This section also
describes the predictive text entry system that reduces the
amount of key strokes associated with entering text.
Selecting the Text Input Method
The Text Input Method can be assigned from within one of two
locations:
Settings Menu:
Your phone comes equipped with an orientation detector that can
tell if the phone is being held in an upright (Portrait) or sideways
(Landscape) orientation. This is useful when entering text.
ᮣ
Press
Language and keyboard
Text Input field:
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
Select input method
.
Your phone also provides several on-screen keypad text entry
options to make the task of text entry that much easier.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, touch and hold
Text Input Methods
the text input field to open the context-menu.
There are two text input methods available:
2. Select the input method (Samsung keypad or Swype).
•
•
Samsung keypad: an on-screen QWERTY keypad that can be
used in both portrait and landscape orientation.
Swype (default): a new way to enter text on touch screens.
Instead of tapping each key, use your finger to trace over each
letter of a word.
The on-screen QWERTY keypad works the same in both portrait
and landscape mode.
Default Text
Input Method
75
SWYPE Settings
Entering Text Using Swype
Swype™ is the default text input method that allows you to enter
a word by sliding your finger or stylus from letter to letter, lifting
your finger between words. SWYPE uses error correcting
algorithms and a language model to predict the next word.
SWYPE also includes a touch predictive text system.
To configure Swype settings:
1. Press
keyboard
➔
and then tap
➔
Language and
➔
Swype.
2. Locate the Preferences section to alter these settings:
• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.
Default language is US English.
The on-screen keyboard options are different between the
Android keyboard and Swype on-screen input methods.
• Audio feedback: turns on sounds generated by the Swype
application.
Enabling and Configuring SWYPE
If you configure another text input method (Samsung keypad) you
must re-enable SWYPE before using the SWYPE keyboard.
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter
text using the keypad.
• Show tips: turns on a flashing indicator for quick help.
3. Locate the Swype Advanced Settings section to alter these
settings:
When SWYPE is enabled there can also be normal keyboard
functionality.
1. Press
Language and keyboard
2. Tap Select input method
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
• Word suggestion: suggests words as you are typing.
➔
Swype
.
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the
next word.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
sentence.
• Show complete trace: once enabled, sets wether or not to display
the complete Swype path.
Entering Text
76
• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to
Swype Text Entry Tips
on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed)
You can access the
or Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK
.
SwypeTips application and
watch a video or tutorial on
using Swype. You can also
use the following Swype text
entry tips.
• Personal dictionary: helps to manage your personal dictionary.
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: once enabled, deletes any words you
have added to Swype’s dictionary.
4. Locate the Help section to alter these settings:
• Swype help: allows you to view the on-line user manual for Swype.
• Tutorial: a short tutorial that helps you to get started using Swype.
5. Locate the About section to review the Swype application
information:
•
•
•
•
Create a squiggle (like an S
shape) to create a double
letter (such as pp in apple).
Touch and hold a key to view
the punctuation menu then
make a selection.
• Version: lists the Swype version number.
Move your finger or stylus
over the apostrophe to enter
contractions.
Double-touch on the word you
want to change to correct a
misspelled word, then touch the delete key to erase one character.
Touch and hold the delete key to erase an entire word.
77
–
–
123ABC mode contains alphanumeric characters and a few common
punctuation marks. Text mode button indicates SYM
SYM mode contains only symbols and numbers. Text mode button
indicates 123ABC
Selecting a Text Input Mode in Swype
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
.
.
• SWYPE tips: Tapping this button displays the Swype tips and
tutorial screen.
2. With Swype as your text entry method, select one of the
following text mode options:
123
• 123 ABC
to use Swype with alphanumeric characters from
ABC
the on-screen keyboard.
Recipients
123
• SYM (Symbol)
SYM
on-screen keyboard.
to enter numbers and symbols from the
Text input field
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
key changes to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
Current Mode
Swype Keyboard Overview
• Recipients: a field where you can enter the recipients of the current
message. You can choose from Recent Contacts, or Group
CAPS/ALT
key
,
.
• Text Input field: a field where text, number, or other characters can
be entered.
Delete
• CAPS/ALT key: When in 123ABC mode, this key changes the
capitalization of the subsequent entered characters. When in SYM
mode, this key can show additional symbol characters.
SWYPE Tips
Text Input mode
Voice actions
• Text Input mode: There are two available modes: 123ABC and
SYM.
Entering Text
78
Using 123ABC Mode in SWYPE
All lowercase
In 123ABC mode, you can enter only letters and a few common
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase. Pressing this while in 123SYM mode,
reveals additional numeric-symbols keys.
punctuation marks from the onscreen keyboard. The text mode
123
key shows
.
SYM
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
Initial Uppercase
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters
are lowercase.
123
2. Tap
to configure the keyboard for 123ABC mode
ABC
(showing letters and numbers on the onscreen keys). Once
123
in this mode, the text input type shows
.
All Uppercase
SYM
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
key changes to
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
3. Swipe your finger continuously over the letters to form a
By default, the first letter of an entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lower case. After a word is entered and you
lift your finger, the cursor automatically adds a space after the
word.
word.
–
If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character. Touch
to erase an entire word.
to send the message.
and hold
Note: If multiple word choices exist for your Swype entry, an on-screen
4. Tap
Send
popup appears to provide additional word choices.
79
Entering Numbers and Symbols in SWYPE
For example:
•
•
To enter
&
: tap 123SYM and select the
&
key.
By using the on-screen keyboard in portrait mode, some symbols
are not available (such as Emoticons or Smileys). In SYM mode
using Swype, you can only enter symbols and numbers from
To enter
or
~: tap 123SYM and draw a small circle over the
&
key.
To enter
~: tap 123SYM and then touch and hold the
&
key.
the on-screen keyboard. Once in SYM mode, the text mode key
Using the Samsung Keypad
This QWERTY keypad can be used to enter text in either a Portrait
or landscape orientation. The only difference between the two
orientations are the sizes of the keys.
123
ABC
shows
.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
123
From a screen where you enter text, rotate your phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation. The on-screen
QWERTY keypad displays.
2. Tap
to configure the keyboard for SYM mode. Once
SYM
123
in this mode, the text input type shows
.
ABC
3. Tap the on-screen key for the number or symbol you want
to enter.
4. Touch and hold an on-screen key to enter the secondary
symbol (above the main one on the same key).
5. Tap
to choose from additional symbols.
Entering Text
80
The Samsung Keypad
Text input field
Shift key
This phone has a built-in, QWERTY keypad (portrait mode) or
keyboard (landscape mode). Using the QWERTY keypad/
keyboard, you can type letter, numbers, punctuation, and other
characters.
To use the Samsung keypad you must first configure the settings
to default to the Samsung keypad.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Samsung
Language and keyboard
➔
Select input method
➔
keypad
.
– or –
From a screen where you can enter text, tap and hold the
text input field and tap Input method Samsung keypad
➔
.
Input Mode Settings
Indicator
Current Mode
Delete
2. The virtual keyboard is then assigned to the Samsung
keypad configuration for all subsequent text input.
81
Changing the Text Input Mode in Keypad
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
Initial Uppercase
Displays when the first character of each word is
entered as uppercase but all subsequent characters
are lowercase.
2. With Samsung keypad as your text entry method, select
All Uppercase
one of the following text mode options:
ABC
Displays when all characters will be entered as
uppercase characters.
• Abc
: to use alphabetic characters from the on-screen
keyboard. In this mode, the text mode button displays
.
?123
?123
• Symbol/Numeric
: to enter numbers by pressing the
By default, the first letter of a new entry is capitalized and the
following letters are lowercased. After a character is entered, the
cursor automatically advances to the next space.
numbers selecting them on the on-screen keyboard. In this mode,
ABC
the text mode button displays
There are up to 3 available pages of numeric symbols available by
1/3
.
Using ABC Mode in Samsung Keypad
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard.
tapping
.
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, tap
to toggle
capitalization.
2. Tap
to configure the keyboard for ABC mode. Once
ABC
?123
in this mode, the text input type shows
.
All lowercase
Note: After typing an initial uppercase character, the
key changes to
Displays when the next character is entered in
lowercase.
and all letters that follow are in lower case.
Entering Text
82
3. Enter your text using the on-screen keyboard.
To enter symbols:
?123
1. Tap
to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.
–
If you make a mistake, tap
to erase a single character. Touch
to erase an entire word.
to send the message.
and hold
2. Tap the appropriate symbol key.
4. Tap
– or –
Send
1/3
Tap
button to cycle through additional pages.
Using Symbol/Numeric Mode
Use the Symbol/Numeric Mode to add numbers, symbols, or
emoticons. While in this mode, the text mode key displays
•
The first number on this key indicates which page (1, 2, or 3) of
additional characters is active.
Using XT9 Predictive Text
.
ABC
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and
regional error correction.
1. From a screen where you can enter text, tap the text input
field to reveal the on-screen keyboard. Rotate the phone
counterclockwise to a landscape orientation, if desired.
Note: XT9 is only available when ABC mode is selected. XT9 advanced
settings are available only if the XT9 field has been selected.
?123
2. Tap
to configure the keyboard for Symbol mode.
Once in this mode, the text input type shows
.
ABC
1. Press
keyboard
➔
and then tap
➔
Language and
3. Tap a number, symbol, or emoticon character.
➔
Samsung keypad.
– or –
From within an active text entry screen, tap
4. Tap
to return to ABC mode.
ABC
from
the bottom of the screen to reveal the Samsung keypad
settings screen.
83
2. Set any of the following options:
• Tutorial launches a brief onscreen tutorial covering the main
concepts related to the Samsung keypad.
• Portrait keypad types allows you to choose a keypad configuration
(Qwerty Keypad [default] or 3x4 Keypad).
Using XT9 Predictive Text
• Input languages sets the input language. Tap a language from the
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction and
regional error correction, which compensates for users pressing
the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.
available list. The keyboard is updated to the selected language.
• XT9 enables predictive text entry mode. This must be enabled to
gain access to the advanced settings.
1. Press
keyboard
➔
and then tap
➔
Language and
• XT9 advanced settings configuration of more advanced XT9
➔
Samsung keypad.
2. Tap the XT9 field. A checkmark indicates activation.
• Keypad sweeping allows changing between the input modes
without having to use the Input Mode key. You can "sweep" the
displayed keypad aside, in a similar manner to scrolling through the
Home screens.
3. Tap the XT9 advanced settings and configure any of the
following advanced options:
• Word completion tells your device to attempt to predict how to
complete the word you have started. (A green check mark indicates
the feature is enabled.)
• Character preview provides an automatic preview of the current
character selection within the text string. This is helpful when
multiple characters are available within one key.
• Word completion point sets how many letters should be entered
before a word prediction is made. Choose from 2 letters, 3 letters,
4 letters, or 5 letters.
• Auto-capitalization automatically capitalizes the first letter of the
first word in each sentence (standard English style).
• Spell correction enables the automatic correction of typographical
errors by selecting from a list of possible words that reflect both the
characters of the keys you touched, and those of nearby
• Voice input activates the Voice input feature. This is an
experimental feature that uses Google’s networked speech
recognition application.
characters. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Auto full stop automatically inserts a full stop by tapping the space
bar twice.
• Next word prediction predicts the next word you are like to enter.
(A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
Entering Text
84
–
Tap Done to save the substitution rule.
• Auto-append automatically adds predictions to the word you are
typing. (A green check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
4. Press to return to the previous screen.
• Auto-substitution allows the device to automatically replace
misspelled or miskeyed words. This option reduce “typos.” (A green
check mark indicates the feature is enabled.)
• Regional correction automatically tries to correct errors caused
when you tap keys adjacent to the correct keys. (A green check
mark indicates the feature is enabled.
• Recapture sets the device to redisplay the word suggestion list
after selecting the wrong word from the list.
• XT9 my words allows you to add new words to the built-in XT9
dictionary.
–
–
–
Tap Add word.
Use the Register to XT9 my words field to enter the new word.
Tap Done to store the new word.
• XT9 auto-substitution allows you create a word rule by adding
words for automatic substitution during text entry (for example
youve becomes you’ve).
–
Tap the XT9 auto-substitution field. Flick up or down to review the
current list of word substitutions.
–
–
Press
and tap Add.
Enter the original word that will be replaced in the Shortcut field (for
example, youve).
–
Enter the substitute word that will be used in the Substitution field (for
example, you?fve).
85
Section 6: Contacts
This section explains how to use and manage your Contacts List.
You can save phone numbers to your phone’s memory.
4. From the Manage accounts area, tap
account you want to synchronize.
– or –
next to the
Accounts
From the Accounts menu you decide if you want applications to
synchronize, send, and receive data at any given time, or if you
want the applications to synchronize automatically. After
determining how you want the accounts to synchronize, indicate
which account to synchronize with your Contacts list.
Tap Add account to create a new account.
5. Tap an account type to add.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions. The selected account
type synchronizes with your Contacts list.
1. Sign in to your Google account.
2. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accounts and sync
.
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
Settings) ➔ Accounts and sync
(
Applications) ➔
(
.
3. From the General sync settings section, touch one of the
following options:
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the
background.
• Auto-sync: automatically synchronizes your data with the phone.
Contacts
86
Contacts List
Creating a Contact
Important!: The Google and Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account types
are only visible after creating an email account of those types on
your phone.
The default storage location for
saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your phone’s
built-in memory.
•
Phone contacts are stored locally on the device.
Note: If the phone is ever reset to its factory default parameters, contacts
stored on the phone can be lost.
If existing Google and Corporate
email accounts have been
synchronized to your phone,
these will be made available to
your device during the creation
of new entries. These new
Contacts entries can be
assigned or saved to synced
accounts such as Phone, SIM,
Google, or Corporate.
•
SIM contacts are stored within the SIM Card.
Note: SIM contacts only store the Name and Phone number for an entry.
•
•
•
•
T-Mobile Contacts Backup contacts are stored remotely on the
T-Mobile servers and can later be retrieved even if your phone has
been damaged or reset.
Google contacts are shared with your existing Google account and can
also be imported to your phone after you have created a Google Mail
account.
Your phone automatically sorts
the Contacts entries alphabetically. You can create either a
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (also known as Work or Outlook)
contacts are those contacts that are intended to be shared with either
Phone
,
SIM, T-Mobile Contacts Backup, Google, or Microsoft
®
®
an Exchange Server or from within Microsoft Outlook
.
Exchange ActiveSync contact.
Remember this choice assigns the desired default account storage
Note: Before you can save a contact to the Phone, Contact settings must be
set to Save new contacts to Phone
location for new Contact entries.
.
87
Note: When storing an entry into your SIM card, note that only the Name, and
Number are saved. To save additional information for a particular
contact, such as notes, email, dates, etc., it is important to save that
Contact into your phone’s onboard memory.
Note: These label entries can change and are dependant on the selected
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google account
destination type).
7. Tap a phone number field and enter a phone number.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap to create a contact.
(Contacts).
•
Tap
on the QWERTY keyboard to remove a previously
entered phone number.
•
•
Tap
Tap
to enter an additional phone number
to remove a previously entered phone number.
Note: You can also add a new contact by entering a number from the keypad
and pressing and then tap Add to Contacts Create contact
➔
.
Continue with step 3.
8. Enter additional information such as: Internet call, Email
IM Groups, Ringtone Postal address Organization or More
fields to input additional category information.
,
,
,
,
3. Tap a destination type (Phone SIM, T-Mobile Contacts
,
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
)
•
The More field contains the following options: Notes, Nickname,
(depending on where you want to save the new contact
information).
Website, Birthday, and Anniversary.
•
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields
and categories.
4. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name
for this contact using the displayed keypad.
9. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
5. Tap the image icon and select a photo for this contact.
To save a Number from your Keypad:
Selections are: Album, or Take photo
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home Work
Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Phone).
2. Enter a phone number using the on-screen dialpad.
,
,
,
,
,
,
.
Contacts
88
3. Tap Add to Contacts
➔
(Create contact) or select the
Contact entry from the on-screen list.
– or –
Finding a Contact
Press
and then tap Add to Contacts
➔
Create contact
You can store phone numbers and their corresponding names
onto either your SIM card, your phone’s built-in memory, or an
external location (such as Google, Exchange, or T-Mobile
Backup). They are all physically separate but are used as a single
entity, called Contacts.
or select the Contact entry from the on-screen list.
•
If you're updating an existing contact, tap the entry from the list and
proceed to step 5.
4. Tap a destination type (Phone
,
SIM, T-Mobile Contacts
Depending on the storage size of the particular SIM card, the
maximum number of phone numbers the card can store may
differ.
backup, Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
)
(depending on where you want to save the new contact
information).
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
5. Tap the First name and Last name fields, and enter a name
2. Swipe up or down until you see the contact displayed.
for this contact.
– or –
6. Tap the label button (to the left of the Phone number field)
Tap the Search contacts field and begin entering the entry’s
name. Matching entries are then displayed. This process
filters through all of your current account Contact entries to
only show you the matching entries.
to select a category such as Mobile (default), Home
,
Work,
Work Fax Home Fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback.
,
,
,
,
Note: These label entries can change and are dependant on the selected
destination type (ex: Callback might not appear with a Google account
destination type).
– or –
7. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
89
In a single motion, touch and hold the letter tab area (on
the right) until on-screen letters appear, then scroll through
the list. You are then taken to that section of the Contacts
list. Touch the contact entry.
Editing Contact Information
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a contact name from the list.
3. Press
and select Edit.
Note: You can also access an entry’s context menu by touching and holding
an entry then tapping Edit
.
Tabs
Search
Contacts
field
Create
Contact
4. Edit the contact information then tap Save
.
Tabbed
Navigation
Contacts
Context
Menu
Contacts
90
Adding a Number to an Existing Contact
•
•
The More field contains the following options: Notes, Nickname,
Website, Birthday, and Anniversary.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
Use your finger to slide the page up or down to see additional fields
and categories.
2. Touch and hold an entry
and select Edit to reveal
the Contact entry’s
5. Tap Save to complete and store the new entry.
Deleting Contacts
details screen (page 93).
This option allows you to delete your contacts. You can delete all
3. Touch a phone number
field and enter a phone
number.
your entries from your phone’s memory, your SIM card, FDN, or
All.
Important!: Once Contacts List entries are deleted, they cannot be recovered.
•
Tap
on the
QWERTY keyboard to
remove a previously
entered phone number.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Touch and hold a contact name from the list and select
Delete ➔ OK
.
.
•
Tap
additional phone number
Tap to remove a
previously entered phone number.
4. Enter additional information such as: Internet call, Email
IM Groups, Ringtone Postal address Organization or More
fields to input additional category information.
to enter an
Contact Details Screen
•
,
,
,
,
91
–
–
–
Send email: allows you to send an email using your Google account.
Contact List Options
1. From the Home screen, tap
Send message: allows you to send a text or picture message.
.
Display options: allows you to choose to only display contacts that
have phone numbers, sort by first or last name, display contacts first
name first or last name first, display contacts stored to your SIM card,
display contacts stored on your phone, and/or display contacts stored to
2. Press
• Delete: allows you to delete 1 or more of your contacts.
• My profile allows you to set up a profile for yourself. The information will
. The following options display:
:
be the same that you can add for a new contact.
Press and tap Edit to alter this profile information.
–
Settings: allows you to configure where you save new contacts to, or
view your service numbers, or send contact information.
Options include: Save new contacts to, Service numbers, and Send
contact.
• Sync contacts: allows you to manually synchronize all of your
current contacts with their respective accounts.
• Merge with Google: allows you to merge all of your current Contact
entries with your active Google/Gmail account. If several of your
contacts are from other sources such as Corporate email, Internet
email, Facebook, etc.., this allows you to “back them up” or copy
them to your Gmail account. Tap Merge to continue or Cancel to
exit.
• Import/Export: imports or exports contacts to or from the SIM card
or SD card, you can also send namecards via methods such as
Bluetooth, Email, Gmail, or Messaging.
• More
:
–
View Friends: allows you to view only those Contact entries that have
been added from Social Networking Sites (SNS) such as Facebook.
–
Accounts: allows you to add and manage mobile accounts on
Facebook, Twitter, or MySpace. You can also add Corporate or Google
accounts.
–
Speed dial setting: allows you to set up speed-dialing.
Contacts
92
• Print namecard: allows you to print selected information on a
Contact Menu Options
1. From the Home screen, tap
compatible Samsung printer.
.
Contact Entry Options
1. From the Home screen,
2. Touch and hold an entry to reveal the context menu. The
following options display:
tap
.
• Edit: allows you to edit the currently selected Contacts entry.
2. Tap an entry to reveal the
Contact entry’s Overview
Screen. This screen contains
Name, contact numbers,
email, and linked contact
information.
• Delete: allows you to delete the currently selected Contacts entry.
• Join contact: allows you to link the current contact to another
current contact. Similar to a “see also” feature. If you can’t
remember a contact’s information, linking entries can help you find
the person you are looking for.
• Send contact information: allows you to send the current entry
info via text message.
• Add to favorites: allows you to copy the current Contacts entry to
3. Press
to reveal the
the list within the Favorites tab.
context menu specific to this
entry.
• Remove from favorites: allows you to remove the current Contacts
entry from the Favorites tab.
Contact Overview Screen
4. Tap an available option.
• Add to group: allows you to add the current Contacts entry to an
existing group.
• Add to blacklist/ Remove from blacklist: allows you to add or
remove the current Contacts entry to a list of automatically rejected
incoming phone numbers.
• Send namecard via: allows you to send the current Contact entry’s
information to an external recipient via either Bluetooth Email
,
(Exchange or Internet), Gmail, or Messaging
.
93
Next time you synchronize your phone with your accounts, any
updates contacts make to email account names, email
addresses, etc. automatically update in your contacts list.
Joining Contact Information
Most people now maintain multiple email accounts, social
networking logins, and other similar account information. For
example, a Facebook account login name might differ from a
corporate email account login because they are maintained
separately and for different groups of people.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap a contact name (the name you want to link to another
entry) to reveal the Contact entry’s Overview Screen
.
.
This device can synchronize with multiple accounts (such as
Facebook, Twitter, MySpace, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync,
Google, or T-Mobile). When you synchronize your phone with
those accounts, each account creates a separate contact entry in
the Contacts list.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account
information.
3. Press
and then tap Join contact.
4. Tap the second contact entry (the entry in which to link).
The second contact is now linked with the first and the
account information is merged into one screen.
If one of your contacts (Amy Smith) has a regular email account
that you maintain in Gmail, but also has a Facebook account
under her maiden and married name, as well as a Video! chat
account, when you merge those accounts into your Contacts list
you can join all of her entries and view the information in one
record.
Note: The information is still maintained in both entries, but displays in one
record for easier viewing when you link the contacts.
Joining contact information makes sending messages easy. You
can select any account email address or information all from one
screen, versus searching multiple, individual screens to locate
the desired account information.
Important!: It is the second contact image that is displayed for both, but the
first contact’s name that is used.
For example: If Amy (original entry) is joined with Julie (second
entry). Julie appears to disappear and only Amy remains. Tap the
Amy entry (showing the Julie image) to view both.
Contacts
94
5. Tap the main linked contact to view the contact
information you linked. The contacts and information
displays with an icon next to the contact name to indicate
what type of account information is contained in the entry.
Marking a Contact as Default
When you use applications such as the Voice Dialer or other
messaging type applications, the application needs to know
which information is primary (default) in a contact entry list. For
example, when you say “Call John Smith”, if you have three
phone records for John Smith, the Voice dialer is looking for the
“default” number or entry.
Unjoining a Contact
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
The Mark as default option marks one entry in a contact record to
use as the default. This comes in handy when you have multiple
entries for the same person.
2. Tap a contact name (the account name from which you
want to unjoin an entry). This reveals the details for entry.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
Note: Typically this is the same contact with a different name or account
information.
2. Tap a Contact entry.
3. Tap the Joined contacts area.
3. Press
and then tap Mark as default. The Mark as
– or –
default screen displays radio buttons next to the contact
name, phone number, or other contact information.
Press
and then tap Separate contact
.
4. Tap the radio button next to the entry information you want
4. Tap
next to the entry you want to unjoin. The
to be the primary information (such as name, phone
contacts are “unjoined” or separated and no longer display
in the merged record screen. Both contacts now go back to
being separately displayed.
number, or email) and select Save
.
Note: If there are multiple phone numbers assigned to an entry, assigning
one as the default will automatically dial that number when the contact
is selected for dialing.
95
3. Tap Select all to place a check mark alongside all currently
Sending a Namecard
displayed Contact entries.
A Namecard contains contact information, and can be sent to
recipients as a Virtual Business Card (V-card) attachment using
Bluetooth, Google Mail, or as a message.
4. Tap Send and select a delivery method:
• Bluetooth to transmit this contact to another bluetooth-compatible
device.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. Tap a Contact entry.
• Email to attach the contact card to a new outgoing email (Exchange
or Internet).
3. Press
and then tap Send namecard via and select a
Email Gmail, or Messaging
• Gmail to attach the contact card to a new outgoing Internet-based
email.
delivery method: Bluetooth
,
,
.
The Namecard attaches to the selected message type and
is delivered when you send the message.
• Messaging to attach the contact card to a new outgoing text
message.
Sending a namecard using Bluetooth
Note: Email appears as an option only after an Internet or Exchange email
You must create a Contact prior to sending a namecard to a
recipient. For more information, refer to “Creating a Contact” on
page 87.
account has been created.
Sending All Current Namecards
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
Rather than selecting once Contact entry at a time, you can send
all of your current entries at once.
2. Touch and hold the entry to reveal the on-screen context
menu.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap Import/Export
via
.
3. Tap Send namecard via
➔
Bluetooth.
➔
Send namecard
.
Important!: You must activate Bluetooth to use this feature.
Contacts
96
4. Tap the Bluetooth device in which to send this name card.
Copying Contact Information to the microSD Card
Bluetooth forwards the namecard to the recipient.
This procedure allows you to copy entry information saved on the
phone’s memory, onto the SIM card.
Copying Contact Information
Copying Contact Information to the SIM Card
Note: These must be contacts stored on the phone. External entries (Google,
Exchange, etc...) can not be transferred in this manner.
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts list is your phone’s built-in memory. This procedure
allows you to copy numbers saved to the phone’s memory, onto
the SIM card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. From the Contacts List, press
and then tap
Import/Export
➔
Export to SD card.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
3. Tap OK to choose all current phone contact entries.
2. From the Contacts List, press
and then tap
Import/Export
➔
Export to SIM card.
3. Tap Select all to choose all current phone contact entries.
– or –
Select a specific entry by touching an entry. A check mark
indicates a selection.
4. Tap Export. The name and phone number for the selected
contact is then copied to the SIM.
97
5. Your Contacts tab then reflects any updated Contact
Synchronizing Contacts
information.
Syncing data from your managed accounts allows you to add and
manage a new or existing contact from your online or remote
accounts to your phone. Prior to syncing, you must first have an
active Google or Microsoft Exchange account with current
Contact entries, and be signed into your account via the phone.
Note: Syncing of contacts requires you are logged into your Gmail and
Corporate accounts via the device.
Display Options
With syncing, any Contacts entries (with phone numbers, email
addresses, pictures, etc.) are updated and synced with your
phone. For more information about syncing existing managed
The Display options menu allows you to allows you to choose
whether to display contacts saved from the Phone, SIM, T-Mobile
Contacts Backup, external source, or all. You can also choose to
display only contacts that have phone numbers.
1. Press
sync
➔
and then tap
➔
Accounts and
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap More
.
.
➔
Display options.
2. Locate the email account containing the contacts you wish
Configure any of the following options:
to synchronize.
• Only contacts with phones allows you to display only those
contacts containing phone numbers.
3. Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
account’s synchronization settings screen.
• Sort by defines how the current list of Contacts are sorted: Given
name or Family name
.
4. To synchronize Contacts, tap Sync Contacts. A green
• Display contacts by defines how the current list of Contacts are
listed: Given name first (ex: Steve Smith) or Family name first
(Smith, Steve).
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
Note: The process of updating your Contacts tab can take several minutes. If
after 10-20 minutes, your list has not been updated, repeat step 2-3.
Contacts
98
• Select contacts to display allows you to filter Contacts based on
category entries from within the locations such as: Phone SIM
T-Mobile Contacts Backup Google, and Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync
5. After synchronizing accounts you may want to link contact
,
,
,
.
3. Tap Done
.
To add Facebook content to your Contacts list:
Adding more Contacts via Accounts and Sync
You can now add your Facebook contact information, such as
pictures, email, and phone numbers directly to your Contacts list.
All of their current contact information is then migrated over to
your phone. If a Contacts entry already exists with a slightly
different name, separate entries are created and can later be
linked (joined) together into a single entry.
When you synchronize applications such as Facebook, Twitter,
MySpace, a corporate email account, or Google, using the
Accounts and sync option synchronizes the data from the
selected account type with your Contacts list.
1. Press
sync
➔
and then tap
➔
Accounts and
➔
Add account.
Important!: This process not only synchronizes your contact information but
also your status, events, and more.
2. Determine which type of account information you want to
synchronize with your Contact list. Selections are:
1. Press
sync
➔
and then tap
Facebook.
➔
Accounts and
Windows Live Hotmail, Yahoo! Mail, Facebook, Twitter,
LinkedIn, Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync, Google, Blio, Video
➔
Add account
➔
2. Select your country and accept the terms of the Social
Hub, then tap Agree
Chat, or T-Mobile Contacts Backup
.
.
3. Tap an account type to add.
3. Read the on-screen descriptions and tap Next
.
4. Follow the prompts. The selected account type
4. Log into your Facebook account:
synchronizes with your Contacts list.
•
Enter your account’s access Email and Password information and
tap Log in
.
99
5. Tap those contact settings you wish to synchronize (all are
enabled by default). A green circle indicates the feature is
enabled.
My Profile
You can send this Virtual Business Card (V-card) to other contacts
as an attachment. My Profile is the first Contact listed in the
Contacts list.
•
Choose from: Sync contacts
6. Tap Done to complete the login and sync process.
7. Tap to confirm your Facebook contacts are now
,
Sync message, or Sync calendar
.
Note: As with any profile, your profile can be associated with a group.
To create My Profile:
synchronized and appear in your Contacts list.
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
To resync Social Network Contacts:
2. Press
and then tap My profile.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
➔
Accounts and
To edit My Profile:
sync.
1. With My profile displayed, press
2. Modify any of the information contained in My Profile, then
tap Save
and then tap Edit.
2. Tap
within the adjacent SNS account field to reveal
the account’s synchronization settings screen.
3. Tap Sync now
.
.
Note: From the main Accounts and sync page you can also tap Sync all to
resync all accounts.
Contacts
100
Contact List Settings
Additional Contact Options
Sending an Email to a Contact
From this menu you can determine the default storage location
for Contacts, display your phone’s primary number, and view
service numbers listed in your Contact list.
Note: Contacts must contain and email account and address before you can
use the Send email feature.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap More
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap More
contain an email address display.
.
➔
Settings.
➔
Send email. Contacts that
3. Select one of the following options:
• Save new contacts to: defines the default storage location of new
Contacts. Choose from: Always ask Phone SIM T-Mobile
,
,
,
3. Tap the contact(s) to which you want to send an email. A
Contacts Backup Google, or Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync
,
.
check mark displays next to the selection.
• Send contact: allows you to define what set of namecards are sent
when you choose to send namecards to other sources.
Note: The select contact must have an email as part of their details screen.
–
–
Read the on-screen description of this feature and tap Next
.
Select either Send all namecards or Send individual namecards
.
4. Tap Send
.
5. Select an email account type.
6. Compose the email and tap Send
Export/Import
.
101
Adding an Existing Entry to a Current Caller Group
Groups
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
.
This feature allows you to add a new or existing contact to a call
group. This group can be one of the already present groups
(Family, Friends, or Work) or a user-created group.
Groups
2. Tap a group entry ➔
(Add group member).
3. From the available list of contacts, tap the contact(s) you
Creating a New Caller Group
want to add. A check mark displays next to contact entry.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Groups tab).
Groups
4. Tap Add. The selected contacts are added to the group.
2. Press and then tap Create
.
Removing an Entry From a Caller Group
3. Tap the Group name field and use the on-screen keypad to
enter a new group name. For more information, refer to
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
.
Groups
2. Tap a group entry.
3. Press
and then tap Remove member.
4. Tap Ringtone and select a ringtone for the group.
4. Tap all of the contacts you want to remove from this group.
Selections are: Default ringtone
,
Select sound from Files, or
A checkmark displays next to contact entry.
Phone ringtone
.
5. Tap Remove.The contacts are removed from the group.
5. Tap Save to store the newly created group.
Note: Some externally maintained group types (such as Google) can only be
managed or updated remotely online vs via the phone. These external
types will not allow editing or deleting members locally via the phone.
Contacts
102
Editing a Caller Group
Sending a Message to a Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
.
To edit a Group entry, there must be at least one member as part
of the selected group.
Groups
2. Tap an existing group,
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
.
Groups
and press
and then
2. Touch and hold a group entry then select Edit group
.
tap Send message
.
– or –
3. Make modifications to the Group name or Ringtone fields.
For more information, refer to “Creating a New Caller
Group” on page 102.
Touch and hold a group
entry and select Send
message
.
4. Tap Save
.
3. Select the recipients of
the new message
Deleting a Caller Group
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
.
Groups
(indicated by a green
checkmark). If an entry
contains multiple phone
numbers, each must be
selected individually.
2. Press
3. Select either Select all or tap the desired group.
4. Tap Delete
5. Select either Group only or Group and group members
and then tap Delete.
.
.
4. Tap Send
.
5. Type your message, and tap Send
.
103
The Favorites Tab
The Favorites tab is a list of the phone numbers that have been
designated as favorite contacts. For more information, refer to
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Tap Favorites tab).
Adding a contact to your favorites list:
3. From within the Favorites tab, press
to favorites
.
(
Favorites
and select Add
.
4. Place a check mark alongside those current Contacts
entries you wish to assign as favorites.
5. Tap Add to complete the process.
Contacts
104
Section 7: Messages
This section describes how to send or receive different types of
messages. It also explains the features and functionality
associated with messaging.
The Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and
receive multimedia messages (such as picture, video, and audio
messages) to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s multimedia message service.
Types of Messages
Your phone provides the following message types:
•
•
•
•
•
Text Messages
Important!: When creating a message, adding an image, a sound file, or a
video clip to a text message changes the message from a text
message to a multimedia message.
Multimedia (Picture, Video, and Audio) Messages
Email and Gmail Messages
Google Talk
Messaging icons are displayed at the top of the screen and
indicate when messages are received and their type. For more
Instant Messages (IM)
Message Icons on the Status Bar
1. From the Home screen, tap
New message).
(Messaging) ➔
Icons are displayed on the Status Bar at the top of the display
when new messages are received. For more information, refer to
(
2. Tap the Enter recipient field to manually enter a recipient.
Creating and Sending Messages
– or –
The Short Message Service (SMS) lets you send and receive text
messages to and from other mobile phones or email addresses.
To use this feature, you may need to subscribe to your service
provider’s message service.
3. Tap
to select from one of the following:
• Contacts: to select a recipient from your Contacts list (valid entries
must have a wireless phone number or email address).
• Recent: to select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages.
• Groups: to select a recipient from the Group list.
105
• Favorites: to select a recipient from the Favorites list.
4. If adding a recipient from either Recent, Contacts, or
Group, tap the contact to place a checkmark then tap Add
The contact displays in the recipient field.
Quick Messaging a Number from the Contacts List
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
.
2. Locate a contact from the list.
3. In a single motion, touch and slide your finger over the
number by going to the left. This action addresses a new
text message to the recipient.
Note: Delete any unnecessary members in the list by selecting the trash can
icon and deleting unwanted entries.
Message Options
1. From the Home screen, tap
5. Tap the Tap to enter message field and use the on-screen
(Messaging).
2. From within an open message, press
to display
additional messaging options:
6. Add more recipients by tapping either the Enter recipient
• Insert smiley: allows you to add insert smiley icons images
field or
and selecting recipients.
(emoticons).
7. Review your message and tap Send.
• Preview: provides a preview of the MMS message content.
8. If you have more than one recipient, the same text
message is sent to all recipients in the Enter Recipients
field.
• Call: places an outgoing call to the sender.
• Add text: allows you to add text items from sources such as:
Location, Contacts, Calendar, Memo, Text, and Text
templates.
• View contact: reveals the current Contact’s overview screen.
Note: If you exit a message before you tap send the message automatically
saves as a draft.
Messages
106
• Add/Remove slide: converts an SMS message into an MMS
(Multimedia) message and allows you to attach an existing
slideshow.
2. Tap
to play a multimedia message.
3. In a single motion, touch and scroll up or down the page to
scroll through the message (if additional pages were
added).
–
Once the message has been converted into in an MMS message,
press and tap More to choose from these options: Add slide,
Remove slide, Add subject, Duration (5 sec), Layout (bottom), or Delete
message.
Message Threads
Sent and received text and picture messages are grouped into
message threads. Threaded messages allow you to see all the
messages exchanged (similar to a chat program) and displays a
contact on the screen.
• More: (when in an SMS message - plain text) provides additional
options such as: Add subject and Delete messages.
Viewing Newly Received Messages
When you receive a message, your phone notifies you by
Message threads are listed in the order in which they were
received, with the latest message displayed at the top.
displaying
within the Notification area at the top left of
your Home screen.
To read a message:
– or –
From the Home screen, tap
then tap the new
message to view its contents. The selected message
displays on the screen.
107
To reply to a text message:
To access message thread options:
Current Recipient
My Text
1. From the Home screen,
ᮣ
From the main Messaging screen, touch and hold the
message to display the following options:
tap
.
• View contact: displays the Contact’s Overview page.
2. While the message is
open, tap the Type to
• Add to contact: begins the process of adding the new number to
your Contacts list.
compose field and then
type your reply message.
• Delete thread: deletes the currently selected message thread.
To access additional Bubble options:
3. Compose your reply.
Your texts are colored
Blue and your caller’s
replies are Yellow.
ᮣ
Touch and hold the message bubble to display the
following options:
• Delete message: deletes the currently selected message bubble
from the thread.
• Add to Contacts: adds the current caller to your Contacts list.
4. Tap Send to deliver your
• Copy message text: copies the currently selected message bubble
reply.
from the thread.
– or –
• Lock/Unlock message: locks or unlocks the currently selected
message bubble from being accidentally deleted.
Reply Bubble
Text Message Thread
Press
and then
select one of the
• Forward: allows you to forward the currently selected message
bubble to an external recipient.
available message options (page 106).
• Copy to SIM: copies the currently selected message bubble as a
single text message within the SIM card.
• View message details: displays details for the currently selected
message bubble.
Messages
108
5. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to end the
Deleting Messages
process.
Deleting a message thread
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
Message Search
You can search through your messages by using the Message
Search feature.
2. Touch and hold a message from the Messages list, then
select Delete thread
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap Search
3. Use the on-screen keypad to enter a word or phrase in
which to search, then tap
.
3. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit.
.
Deleting a single message
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
.
2. Open a message to reveal the message string.
4. All messages that contain the entered search string
3. Touch and hold a message bubble, then select Delete
display.
message
.
Messaging Settings
To configure the settings for text messages, multimedia
messages, Voice mails, and Push messages.
4. At the prompt, tap OK to delete or Cancel to exit.
Deleting multiple messages
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap Settings
The following Messaging settings are available:
.
2. Press and then tap Delete threads
.
.
3. Tap each message thread you want to delete. A checkmark
displays beside each selected message.
4. Tap Delete
.
109
Settings
Multimedia message (MMS) settings
• Message font size: enables the phone to change the display size
for the on-screen front. Choose from: Normal, Small, or Tiny.
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs
you whether or not your message was delivered.
• Split view: enables the phone to display a split view window when
the phone is in landscape view.
• Read reports: when this option is activated, your phone receives a
request for a read reply along with your message to the recipient.
Storage settings
• Auto-retrieve: allows the message system to automatically retrieve
messages.
• Delete old messages: deletes old messages when the limit is
reached, rather than overwriting them.
• Roaming auto-retrieve: allows the message system to
automatically retrieve while roaming.
• Text message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many text
messages are allowed in one conversation.
• Creation mode: allows you to select the creation mode: Free,
Restricted, or Warning.
• Multimedia message limit: allows you to set a limit on how many
multimedia messages are allowed in one conversation.
–
–
Restricted: you can only create and submit messages with content
belonging to the Core MM Content Domain.
Text message (SMS) settings
Warning: the phone will warn you via pop up messages that you are
creating a multimedia message which does not fit the Core MM Content
Domain.
• Delivery reports: when this option is activated, the network informs
you whether or not your message was delivered.
• Manage SIM card messages: allows you to manage the
messages stored on the SIM card.
–
Free: you may add any content to the message.
Push message settings
• Message Center: allows you to enter the number of your message
center where your messages reside while the system is attempting
to deliver them.
• Push message: allows you to receive push messages from the
network.
• Service loading: allows you to set the type of service loading
notification. Choose from: Always, Prompt, or Never.
• Input mode: allows you to set the input mode for your text
messages. Choose from: GSM Alphabet, Unicode, or Automatic.
Notification settings
• Notifications: allows you to see message notifications on your
status bar.
Messages
110
• Select ringtone: allows you to set the ringtone for your message
notifications.
Email
Email (or Internet Email) enables you to review and create email
using several email services. You can also receive text message
alerts when you receive an important email. Your phone’s Email
application lets you access and manage multiple email accounts
simultaneously in one convenient location.
Text Templates
This screen displays your available text message reply
templates. This is a readily accessible list of both default and
user-defined text snippets that can be used to quickly reply to
incoming messages.
There are currently three main types of email accounts on your
phone: Gmail, Internet-based email (Gmail, Yahoo, etc..), and
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
®
Microsoft Exchange (Corporate email or Outlook ).
2. From the Messaging list, press
and then tap Text
To send and receive email messages through an ISP (Internet
Service Provider) account, or if you wish to use your device to
access your corporate email through a VPN (Virtual Private
Network), you will first need to set up an IMAP or POP account.
templates
.
3. Tap a message to immediately insert it into your current
message conversation.
•
•
•
IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) - This protocol is frequently
used in large networks and commercial settings. IMAP4 is the current
standard.
To create your own text template:
1. From the Home screen, tap
.
2. From the Messaging list, press
and then tap Text
POP3 (Post Office Protocol) - This protocol is supported by most ISPs
(Internet service providers) and common among consumer
applications. POP3 is the current standard.
templates
3. Tap
4. Enter a new text string and tap Save
.
(Create template).
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync - This protocol is frequently used
with a large corporate email server system and provides access to
email, contact, and calendar synchronization.
.
111
Creating an Internet Email Account
1. From the Home screen, tap
• Password: typically your network access password
(case-sensitive).
(Applications) ➔
3. Tap Set as premium account, to make this not only your
primary email account, but also link it to your Social Hub
(
Email).
2. If you already have other email account setup:
•
•
Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the
complete email account list page.
4. Tap Send email from this account by default, to make this
your default email account for outbound emails.
Press
and then tap Add account.
5. Tap Next. If prompted to sign up to Social Hub, tap OK
.
Account name
•
•
Tap Manual setup to configure your connection settings manually
(POP3 or IMAP). Follow the on-screen prompts and enter the
information specific to your email provider.
The unique account name is used to differentiate this account from
other email accounts accessed by your device.
6. At the Set up email screen, name the account and enter a
screen name to identify yourself on this account. If you
have already setup this account, skip to step 7.
– or –
7. Messages for this account display on the Inbox tab. You
can also view Personal information for this account,
Receipts (if you setup the account to return receipts),
Travel information, and more (if available).
Enter your Email address and Password information.
Tap Show password to view the password string as you
enter it.
• Email address: your Outlook work email address.
8. Tap Done to store the new account.
Messages
112
3. Tap Inbox
➔
(Compose).
Important!: Only some “Plus” accounts include POP access allowing this
program to connect. If you are not able to sign in with your
correct email address and password, you may not have a paid
“Plus” account. Launch the Web browser to access your
account.
4. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.
•
If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate
the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
recipients as you want.
Opening an Email
5. Press
and then tap Add Cc/Bcc to add additional
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Email).
carbon copy recipients.
2. Tap the account name field (upper-right) to open the
•
•
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
complete email account list page.
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.
3. Select an email account and tap an email message.
6. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
7. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
Refreshing Email messages
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Email).
•
To add a n attachment (such as image, video, audio, etc..),
tap Attach (from the bottom of the screen) and make a category
selection.
2. Select an email account.
•
If you are already in an email account, tap the account name field
(upper-right) to open the complete email account list page.
–
–
Tap the file you wish to attach.
Tap to delete the attached file.
•
Select an available email account.
•
To insert a Gallery, Contacts, Location, Calendar, and Memo item,
tap Insert and make a selection.
3. Press
and then tap Refresh.
–
Tap the file you wish to attach.
Composing Email
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Email).
Note: If you attach an image to your email, you have the option to resize it
prior to delivery. Choose from: Original, Large (70%), Medium (30%),
2. Tap the account name field (upper-right) to open the
or Small (10%). Once chosen, tap OK
.
complete email account list page.
113
8. Once complete, tap Send
.
• Email notifications: Activates the email notification icon to appear
within the Notifications area of the status bar when a new Internet
mail (Gmail, etc..) is received.
Configuring Email Settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Email).
• Select ringtone: Plays a selected ringtone when a new email
message is received.
2. Select an account.
• Vibration: Activates a vibration when a new email message is
received.
3. From the email list screen, press
and then tap More
➔
Account settings
.
• Incoming settings: Lets you specify incoming email settings, such
as User Name, Password, IMAP server, Port, Security type, and
IMAP path prefix.
4. Alter any of the following settings:
• Account name: displays your uniquely created account display
• Outgoing settings: Lets you specify outgoing email settings, such
as SMTP server, Security type, Port, Require sign-in, User name, or
Password.
name.
• Your name: displays the name used in the From field of your
outgoing email messages.
• Forward with files: Lets you include attachments when forwarding
an email.
• Add signature: Lets you attach a customized signature to the
bottom of all outgoing emails.
• Split view mode enables the phone to display a split view window
when the phone is in landscape view.
• Signature: Lets you create an email signature for your outgoing
Gmail email messages.
Microsoft Exchange Email (Outlook)
• Email check frequency: adjusts the time interval used by your
device to check your email account for new email messages.
Your phone also provides access to your company’s Outlook
Exchange server. If your company uses either Microsoft
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you can use this email
application to wirelessly synchronize your email, Contacts, and
Calendar information directly with your company’s Exchange
server.
• Default account: Assign this account as the default email account
used for outgoing messages.
• Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email
address in either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always
receive a copy of outgoing emails.
Messages
114
Setting Up a Microsoft Exchange Email account
Email).
2. If you already have other email account setup:
3. Tap Set as premium account, to make this not only your
primary email account, but also link it to your Social Hub
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(
4. Tap Send email from this account by default, to make this
•
Tap the account name field (upper-left) to open the
complete email account list page.
your default email account for outbound emails.
•
Press
and then tap Add account.
5. Tap Done
➔
Next. Consult your Network or IT Administrator
for further details and support.
Account name
6. Tap Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync (from the add new
email account screen).
7. When prompted to provide additional detailed information,
enter an updated Domain, and confirm your User name and
Password information.
•
If your network requires SSL encryption, tap the Use secure
connection (SSL) field to place a check mark in the box and
activate this additional level. Most often, this option should be
enabled.
– or –
Enter your Email address and Password information.
Tap Show password to view the password string as you
enter it.
•
If your network requires that you accept SSL certificates, tap the
Accept all SSL certificates field to place a check mark in the box
and activate this additional level. Most often, this option is not
required. Confirm this information with your IT Administrator.
• Email address: your Outlook work email address.
• Password: typically your network access password
(case-sensitive).
Important!: If your exchange server requires this feature, leaving this field
unchecked can prevent connection.
115
8. If your connection fails, you can be prompted to manually
update or re-enter your Exchange server information within
the appropriate field. This field can often be populated with
incorrect or out of date information.
3. Select an exchange email account and tap an email
message.
Refreshing Exchange Email
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Select an exchange email account.
3. Press and then tap Refresh
➔
(
Email).
• Exchange Server: your exchange server remote email address.
Typically starts with mail.XXX.com. Obtain this information from
your company network administrator.
.
Composing Exchange Email
1. From the Home screen, tap
Important!: Do not accept the default entry as this is a guess based on
returned information.
➔
(
Email).
9. With the new server information entered, tap Next
10. Read the on-screen activation disclaimer and, if prompted,
tap OK
11. Adjust the various on-screen configuration fields and tap
Next
12. Identify your new work email account with a unique name
.
2. Press
3. Select an exchange email account.
4. Tap Inbox and tap Compose).
5. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.
and then tap Accounts.
.
(
.
•
If you are sending the email message to several recipients, separate
the email addresses with a comma. You can add as many message
recipients as you want.
(Ex: Work), then tap Done
.
6. Press
and then tap Add Cc/Bcc to add additional
Opening an Exchange Email
carbon copy recipients.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Email).
•
•
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.
2. Tap the account name field (upper-right) to open the
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.
complete email account list page.
7. Tap the Subject field and enter the email subject.
Messages
116
8. Tap the email text field and compose your email message.
3. Toggle either the Sync Contacts or Sync Calendar fields to
force the device to manually resync either the exchange
Contacts or Calendar entries.
•
To add a picture attachment, tap Attach (from the bottom of the
screen) and make a category selection.
•
•
Tap the file you wish to attach.
– or –
Tap
to delete the attached file.
Tap Account settings and specify any other email settings
you wish to synchronize:
Note: If you attach an image to your email, you have the option to resize it
prior to delivery. Choose from: Original, Large (70%), Medium (30%),
or Small (10%). Once chosen, tap OK
.
• Account name displays the name used by the device to track the
account.
9. Once complete, tap Send
.
• Add signature activates the email signature feature.
Deleting an Exchange Email Message
• Signature allows you to create an outgoing email signature
attached to new email messages sent from your phone.
ᮣ
Touch and hold an email (from your inbox list) and select
Delete from the on-screen context menu.
– or –
• Default account assigns this account as the default used when
sending out new email messages.
• Always Cc/Bcc myself allows you to include your own email
address in either the CC, Bcc, or None fields. Lets you always
receive a copy of outgoing emails.
With the email message displayed, tap
(
Delete).
Configuring Microsoft Exchange Email Settings
• Period to sync email to assign the sync range for your incoming
and outgoing email messages between your phone and your
external exchange server. How many days worth of email
1. Press
➔
and then tap
➔
Accounts and
sync.
messages should the phone and server synchronize. Choose from:
1 day 3 days, 1 week, 2 weeks, or 1 month.
,
2. Tap
adjacent to the Microsoft Exchange account field
• Empty Server Trash: allows you to delete your email account’s
trash bin remotely.
to reveal the account’s synchronization settings screen.
• Sync schedule allows you to configure your email sync schedule.
117
• Period to sync Calendar assigns a period for your phone to sync
calendar events.
• Sync Contacts synchronizes the contacts between your phone and
the remote exchange server.
• Size to retrieve emails configures the incoming email size allowed
to pass through to your phone automatically without user
interaction. Emails with attachments larger than configured will
have to be retrieved manually.
• Sync Calendar synchronizes your exchange calendar entries
between your phone and the remote exchange server.
• Split view mode enables the phone to display a split view window
when the phone is in landscape view.
• Security options: allows you to enable several security options
such as: Encryption, Encryption algorithm, Sign, Sign algorithms,
Email certificates, and Security policy list. These security policies
could restrict some functions from corporate servers.
4. Press
to return to the previous page.
Using Google Mail
Google Mail (Gmail) is Google’s web-based email. When you first
setup the phone, Gmail is configured. Depending on the
synchronization settings, Gmail is automatically synchronized
with your Gmail account.
–
Security policy list: lists the current email’s security policy. These
policies could restrict some functions from corporate servers.
• In case of Sync Conflict allows you to assign the master source on
emails. If there is a conflict with the current email sync you can
assign the server as the main source for all emails (Update to
phone) or assign the phone to be the main source and update the
server accordingly (Update to server).
Signing into Google Mail
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Gmail).
• Email notifications enables the phone to display a status bar icon
when new email messages have been received.
Note: You must sign in to your Gmail account in order to access features
such as Google Mail and Android Market.
• Select ringtone assigns an audible ringtone when a new or
upcoming event is pending.
2. Tap Next to add a Google account.
• Vibration assigns a vibration when a new or upcoming event is
3. Tap Create if you do not have a Google account.
pending.
– or –
• Incoming settings provides access to the Domain, password, and
Exchange server settings.
Tap Sign in if you have a Google account.
The Inbox loads conversations and email.
Messages
118
Opening Gmail
Viewing a Gmail Message
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Gmail).
1. From the Gmail Inbox, tap a message to view the following
options:
2. Tap an existing email message.
• Archive: archives the selected Email.
• Delete: deletes the Email.
• <: displays older Emails.
Refreshing Google Mail
ᮣ
From within the Gmail message list, press
and then
tap Refresh to send and receive new emails and
• >: displays newer Emails.
synchronize your email with the Gmail account.
2. Press
options:
to select one of the following additional
Composing a Gmail Message
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Gmail).
• Change labels: changes the label on the email or conversation.
2. From the Gmail Inbox, press
and then tap Compose
.
• Mark unread: unread messages or threads with unread messages
display in boldface text in the Inbox.
3. Enter the recipients Email address in the To field.
• Go to inbox: displays the Google Mail Inbox.
• Mute: mutes the conversation.
Tip: Separate multiple recipient email addresses with a comma.
• Add/Remove star: click a message's star to add or remove the
star (just like clicking flags in Outlook).
4. Press
and select Add Cc/Bcc to add a carbon or blind
• More
:
copy.
–
–
–
Report spam: reports the Email message as spam.
5. Enter the subject of this message in the Subject field.
Settings: allows you to configure the General, or Notification settings.
6. Tap the Compose Mail field and begin composing your
Help: launches the browser and displays Google Mobile Help
information.
message.
–
Select text: allows you to select text to copy and paste.
7. Once complete tap
119
(Send).
Creating an Additional Gmail Account
Google Talk
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Gmail).
Google Talk™ is a free Windows and web-based application for
instant messaging offered by Google. Conversation logs are
automatically saved to a Chats area in your Gmail account. This
allows you to search a chat log and store them in your Gmail
accounts.
2. If you already have other email account setup:
•
Tap the account name field (upper-right) to open the
complete email account list page.
Account name
Note: Before using this application, you must first have an active Gmail
account available and be currently logged in.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Talk).
Note: If you are not already logged into Google, refer to the instructions for
2. Begin using Google Talk.
3. Tap Add account and follow the same steps as referenced
in the previous section. For more information, refer to
Note: The Network confirms your login and processes. This could take up to
5 minutes to complete.
Messages
120
7. Tap Next
➔
Next. Your account is displayed.
Using Instant Messaging (IM)
Instant Messaging allows you to send and receive instant
messages using Windows Live Messenger, Google Talk, or Yahoo!
Messenger communities.
8. Follow the on-screen instruction to use IM.
Signing into Your IM Account
Although each account type differs, the initial sign in procedure is
common to all supported IM clients. Before beginning the sign in
procedure, you must complete the previous procedures for
selecting your default IM Community to which you are
subscribed.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(IM).
2. Read the Samsung Social Hub Terms and Conditions, then
tap the I accept all the terms above check box and tap
Agree to continue.
3. To add a new IM account, tap Add account
.
4. Select an IM client of your choice (Windows Live
Messenger, Google Talk, or Yahoo! Messenger).
5. Tap the available fields to enter your information such as
Domain, Email Address, and Password. Select any
additional fields.
6. Tap Done when you are finished entering information.
121
Section 8: Multimedia
This section explains how to use the multimedia features of your
phone, including the Camera/Camcorder, Music Player, and how
to manage your photos, images and sounds.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Camera).
2. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camera at the subject.
You can take photographs and shoot video by using the built-in
camera functionality. Your camera produces photos in JPEG
format.
3. If desired, before taking the photo, use the left area of the
screen to access various camera options and settings.
4. You can also tap the screen to move the focus to a desired
Important!: Do not take photos of people without their permission.
Do not take photos in places where cameras are not allowed.
Do not take photos in places where you may interfere with
another person’s privacy.
area of interest.
5. Press
(Camera key) until the shutter sounds. (The
picture is automatically stored within your designated
storage location. If no microSD is installed, all pictures are
stored on the Phone.) For more information, refer to
Note: An SD card is no longer needed to take pictures or shoot video since
there is already 16GB of built-in storage.
Using the Camera
Taking Photos
Taking pictures with your device’s built-in camera is as simple as
choosing a subject, pointing the camera, then pressing the
camera key.
Note: When taking a photo in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, shadows
may appear on the photo.
Multimedia
122
Self portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you can
take pictures of yourself or video chat.
1
8
2
3
7
Flash: allowsyoutoset theflash optionstoOff, On, orAuto
flash.
A
6
Settings:
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
5
4
Self portrait: allows you to set the front camera so you can
take pictures of yourself or video chat.
Camera Options
Flash: allowsyoutoset theflash optionstoOff, On, orAuto
flash.
Options are represented by icons across both sides of the screen.
Shooting mode: allows you to set the shooting mode.
Options are:
The following shortcuts are available for the camera:
Note: The options disappear after a few seconds. Touch the screen to display
•
•
Single shot: takes a single photo and view it before
returning to the shooting mode.
the tab, then touch the tab to view these options.
Smile shot: the camera focuses on the face of your
subject. Once the camera detects the person’s smile,
it takes the picture.
Focus area: displays the area of the image used as the
main focus area.
•
Beauty: adjusts the contrast to smooth facial features.
123
Settings (continued):
Focus mode: allows you to set this option to Auto focus,
Macro, or Facedetection. Use Autofocus forallotherfocal
situations.
•
Panorama: takes a landscape photo by taking an
initial photo and then adding additional images to
itself. The guide box lets you view the area where the
second part of the panoramic picture should fall
within.
•
Auto focus: automatically focus the image based on
the focus area.
•
•
Macro mode: allows you to take close-up pictures.
•
•
Action shot: detects action and creates a panorama of
the moving object.
Face detection: causes the camera to automatically
recognize if there is a face in the shot. It then
optimizes the focus and exposure the face.
Cartoon: gives your photo a cartoon look.
Scene mode: allows you to set the Scene to help take the
best pictures possible. Options include None, Portrait,
Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,
Sunset, Dawn, Fall color, Firework, Text, Candlelight, and
Backlight. Helpful tips are shown for each scene mode at
the bottom of the display screen.
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
before taking a picture. Options include: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec,
and 10 sec.
Effects:allowsyoutochangethecolortoneorapplyspecial
effects to the photo. Options include: None, Negative,
Grayscale, and Sepia.
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level
by moving the slider.
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:
8M (3264x2448), W6.5M (3264x1968),
3.2M (2048x1536), W2.4M (2048x1232),
0.4M (800x480), or W0.3M (640x480).
Multimedia
124
Settings (continued):
GPS tag: allows you to turn GPS On or Off (also known as
Geotagging). The location of where the picture is taken is
attached to the picture. (Only available in Camera mode.)
White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the
followingchoices:Auto,Daylight,Cloudy,Incandescent,or
Fluorescent.
Shutter sound: allowsyou to set the Shuttersound to On or
Off.
ISO:ISOdetermineshowsensitivethelightmeterisonyour
digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, 400, or 800.
Use a lower ISO number to make your camera less
sensitive to light, a higher ISO number to take photos with
lesslight,orAutotoletthecameraautomaticallyadjustthe
ISO for each of your shots
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage
location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory
card (if inserted).
Reset:allowsyoutoresetallcameraorcamcordersettings
to the default values.
Metering: allows you to set how the camera measures or
meters the light source: Centre-weighted, Spot, or Matrix.
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in
various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera, or down for
Camcorder.
Anti-Shake: compensates for camera movement.
Autocontrast:providesaclearimageevenunderbacklight
circumstances where intensity of illumination can vary
excessively.
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.
Camera button: takes a photo when pressed in Camera
mode.
Image quality: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
125
Video options
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and
the various viewing options for a selected picture. The last
picture you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail in
the Image viewer icon.
• Share: allows you to share a video using Wi-Fi, AllShare,
Messaging, YouTube, Bluetooth, Gmail, Email, Kodak, and
Snapfish.
• Play: allows you to playback the current video file.
• Delete: allows you to delete the current video.
• More: provides additional options.
Pictures and Videos Image Viewer Options
After you take a photo or record a video, you can access various
options.
–
Send to: allows you to send the file to a Contacts entry, New Email
address, or New Phone number.
Photo options
–
Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take
after taking an image (Contacts, New Email address, or New Phone
number).
• Share: allows you to share a picture using AllShare, Photo editor,
Messaging, Picasa, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Gmail, Email, Kodak, or
Snapfish.
–
–
Play: allows you to replay the current video file.
• Delete: allows you to delete the current picture. Tap OK to delete or
Rename: allows you to rename one or more video files.
Cancel
.
Multimedia
126
Camera Gallery Options
Camera Image Options
The Gallery is where you can access the Gallery of stored camera
images.
When you take a picture, the file is saved in the Photo folder. You
can view your pictures immediately or view them anytime in the
Photo folder.
1. From the Home screen,
1. From the Home screen, tap
Gallery).
(Applications) ➔
tap
(
Applications
)
(
➔
(Gallery).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it in the
Image viewer. Touch and drag a picture to the left to see
the next picture or to the right to see the previous picture.
2. Select a folder location
(ex: Camera) and select
an image by tapping it
once to place a green
check mark on the file.
3. Tap the on-screen image and use either of the following
image menu options:
• Send via: allows you to share a picture using Bluetooth, Email,
3. Press
from this
Gmail, Messaging, Wi-Fi, Kodak, or Snapfish.
main Gallery screen to
reveal gallery-specific
• Delete
:
allows you to delete the current image.
4. Press
to select additional options:
options Send via
,
Delete,
• Share via: allows you to share a picture using AllShare or Picasa.
and More
.
• Set as: allows you to assign the current image as either as Contact
icon, Home screen Wallpaper, or Lock screen Wallpaper. For more
127
• More: provides you with the additional options such as:
–
–
Copy: allows you to copy one or more pictures to a different folder.
Print: allows you to print the current image on a compatible Samsung
printer.
–
–
Crop: provides an on-screen box that allows you to crop the current
picture. Tap Save to update the image with the new dimensions or tap
Discard to ignore any changes.
–
–
–
Rotate left: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
counterclockwise direction.
Rotate right: allows you to rotate the view of the current image in a
clockwise direction.
–
–
–
Slideshow: adds the selected photo to a custom slideshow.
Rename: allows you to rename the current file.
Send to: allows you to send the file to a Contacts entry, New Email
address, or New Phone number.
–
Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take
after taking an image (Contacts, New Email address, or New Phone
number). The default storage location for pictures is DCIM > Camera
folder.
–
Details: files details such as Title, Type, Date taken, Album, Location,
Latitude, Longitude, etc..
Multimedia
128
Assigning an Image as a Contact Icon
Applications) ➔
5. Touch and drag the crop box anywhere on the picture.
Touch and drag the sides of the crop box to zoom in or out
to create a cropped area.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Gallery).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press and then tap Set as
Contact icon
4. Tap a contact to make a selection.
5. Crop the image and tap Save
(
(
6. Tap Save to assign the wallpaper image.
– or –
Tap Discard to stop without updating the wallpaper image.
➔
.
Editing a Photo
.
You can edit your photos using the Photo editor application on
Assigning an Image as a Wallpaper
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Using the Camcorder
In addition to taking photos, the camera also doubles as a
camcorder that also allows you to record, view, and send high
definition videos.
(Gallery).
2. Select a folder location and tap a file to open it.
3. With the image displayed, press
and then tap Set as.
4. Select one of the two options:
Note: To ensure the Camcorder can record the video, use an SDHC memory
card.
• Home screen Wallpaper assigns the current image to the home
screen background. This image is spread across all available
screens.
Shooting Video
• Lock screen Wallpaper assigns the selected image to the
background for the lock screen.
Tip: When shooting video in direct sunlight or in bright conditions, it is
recommended that you provide your subject with sufficient light by
having the light source behind you.
129
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Camera) to activate the
Camcorder Options
camera mode.
You can change options using your keypad in capture mode. The
following short cuts are available:
2. Tap and slide the Camera mode button down to Camcorder
Mode.
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to:
Normal, which is limited only by available space on the
destination location, Limit for MMS, which is limited by
MMS size restrictions, and Self recording which activates
the front-facing camera so you can video yourself.
3. Using the phone’s main display screen as a viewfinder,
adjust the image by aiming the camcorder at the subject.
4. Tap the Video key (
) to begin shooting video. The red
light will blink while recording.
5. Tap the Video key (
) again to stop the recording and
Flash:allowsyoutosettheflashoptionstoOfforOn.When
yousettheflashtoOn, itstaysoncontinuallywhileyouare
taking a video.
save the video file to your Camera folder.
6. Once the file has been saved, tap the image viewer, then
tap
to play your video for review.
to return to the viewer.
Settings:
7. Press
Edit shortcuts: allows you to set shortcut icons for the
settings that you use the most.
Flash:allowsyoutosettheflashoptionstoOfforOn.When
yousettheflashtoOn, itstaysoncontinuallywhileyouare
taking a video.
Multimedia
130
Settings (continued):
White balance: allows you to set this option to one of the
followingchoices:Auto,Daylight,Cloudy,Incandescent,or
Fluorescent.
Recording mode: allows you to set the recording mode to:
•
Normal: is limited only by available space on the
Video quality: allows you to set the image quality to:
Superfine, Fine, or Normal.
destination location.
•
•
Limit MMS: is limited by MMS size restrictions.
Guidelines: allows you to turn the guidelines On or Off.
Self recording: activates the front-facing camera so
Storage: allows you to configure the default storage
location for images or videos as either Phone or Memory
card (if inserted).
you can video yourself.
Exposure value: allows you to adjust the brightness level
by moving the slider.
Reset:allowsyoutoresetallcameraorcamcordersettings
to the default values.
Timer: allows you to set a timer for how long to wait
beforetakingavideo.Optionsinclude:Off,2sec,5sec,and
10 sec.
Camera / Camcorder Mode: allows you to take a photo in
various modes. Once you change the mode, the
corresponding indicator appears at the top left of the
display. Slide the button up for Camera mode or down for
Camcorder mode.
Effects:allowsyoutochangethecolortoneorapplyspecial
effects to the photo. Options include: None, Negative,
Grayscale, and Sepia.
Resolution: allows you to set the image size to either:
1920x1080, 1280x720, 720x480, 640x480, 320x240, or
176x144.
Camcorder button: shoots or stops video recording when
pressed in Camcorder mode.
131
• Delete
checkmark, to turn it green, next to any file or folder you want to
delete, then tap Confirm deletions
:
allows you to delete chosen/selected pictures. Tap the
Image viewer: allows you to access the Image viewer and
the various viewing options for a selected video. Image
viewer options are described in the following section. The
last video you took, will be displayed as a thumbnail in
the Image viewer icon.
.
• More: provides you with the additional options such as:
–
–
–
–
Share via: allows you to share your file via YouTube.
Play via: allows you to play your selected file via AllShare.
Rename: allows you to rename one or more video files.
Accessing Videos
Send to: allows you to send the file to a Contacts entry, New Email
When you shoot a video, the file is saved in the Camera folder.
You can view your videos immediately or view them anytime in
the Camera folder.
address, or New Phone number.
–
Set Default Destination: allows you to assign a default action to take
after taking an image (Contacts, New Email address, or New Phone
number).
1. From the Home screen, tap
Gallery).
(Applications) ➔
–
Details: displays video file information.
(
Photo Editor
2. Select a folder location and tap a video icon to begin video
The Photo editor application provides basic editing functions for
pictures that you take on your phone. Along with basic image
tuning like brightness, contrast, and color it also provides a wide
variety of effects used for editing the picture.
playback.
– or –
Touch and hold the video icon from the main Gallery to
select the video (green check mark) and display the
following video menu context options:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Photo editor).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Tap Select picture to edit a picture in your Gallery.
– or –
• Send via: allows you to share a video using Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Messaging, Wi-Fi, Kodak, and Snapfish.
Tap Capture picture to take a picture with the camera.
Multimedia
132
3. Tap the picture and it is loaded into the Photo editor.
Next: move to next photo project.
4. Use the following Photo editor controls to edit your picture:
Previous: move to previous photo project.
Selection Size: allows you to set the size of the
selection tool to Small, Medium, or Large.
Selection: use the selection tool to mark an area for
5. Press
to access the following options:
cropping, rotating, etc.
• New: starts a new Photo editor project. Be sure and save the photo
you are working on before starting a new project.
Crop: allows you to crop (cut-out) an area of a photo.
• Save: saves your photo to your gallery.
• Share: allows you to share your photo via AllShare, Bluetooth,
Rotate:allowsyoutorotateaphotoinall4directions.
You can also mirror image a photo.
Email, Gmail, Messaging, Picasa, or Wi-Fi.
Files
Move: use the move feature to move a photo around
when you are zoomed in and the entire photo is not
showing on the screen.
Files allows you to manage your sounds, images, videos,
bluetooth files, Android files, and other memory card data in one
convenient location. This application allows you to launch a file if
the associated application is already on your phone (ex: MP4).
Tools: allows you to Copy and Paste to different
images. You can also use Warping and Fill.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Files).
(Applications) ➔
Effects: allows you to add various effects to your
(
photo.
Note: Navigation in this viewer works on a hierarchy structure with folders,
Color: allows you to adjust the Saturation, Contrast,
Brightness of a photo. You can also make it Grey-
scale.
subfolders, etc.
133
The Gallery
Note: The application lets you view supported image files and text files on
both your internal storage and microSD card.
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as
a picture message.
Opening and Navigating within Files
DCIM is the default location for pictures or video taken by the
device. These files are actually stored in the DCIM folder location.
Note: If the phone displays a memory full message when accessing the
Gallery, access Files and remove some of the media files from the
folders, and then open the Gallery.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Files).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Tap a folder and scroll down or up until you locate your
Opening the Gallery
selected file.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
• Up tab allows you to back up into a higher directory.
(
• Home tab allows you to back up to the root directory.
•
Press
displayed on-screen. Choose from: List
Thumbnail
Press
Delete
Settings).
and then tap View by to change the way the files are
,
List and details, or
Note: If you stored your files in folders (directories) on the storage card,
Gallery displays these folders as separate albums. The top left album
contains all the pictures in the storage card.
.
•
for these additional options: Share
,
Create folder
,
,
View as List by, and More (Move, Copy, Rename, and
,
3. Once you have located your file, tap the file name to
launch the associated application.
Multimedia
134
3. Tap OK
.
Using the Video Player
The Video Player application plays video files stored on the SD card.
This device is able to playback DivX videos.
Register Your DivX Device for VOD Playback of Purchased
Movies
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
To play purchased DivX movies on your device, you will first need
to complete a one-time registration using both your device and
your computer.
(
Utility) ➔ Videos). A list of videos sorted on
(
the SD card displays in the Video list.
2. Tap a video file to begin viewing.
DivX Overview
1. Write down the DivX registration code that appears
on-screen. Copy this 8 or 10-digit number down.
2. Verify you have the latest DivX software running on your
®
This device is able to playback DivX videos. DivX Certified to
®
computer. Download the free player (for your computer)
play DivX video up to HD 720p, including premium content. If
from www.divx.com
.
you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device,
the message “Authorization Error” will be displayed and your
3. Open the DivX Player on
your computer and from
within the VOD menu,
select Register a DivX
Certified Device...
content will not play. Learn more at www.divx.com/vod
.
Your device must first be registered to playback protected or
purchased DivX content. DRM-free or unprotected content does
not required DivX VOD registration.
Locating Your VOD Registration Number
4. You are prompted to log
in or create a DivX
1. Press
About phone
➔
and then tap
Legal information
(
Settings) ➔
➔
➔
License settings
➔
account if your account
information has not
DivX® VOD > Register
.
2. Write down your Registration code.
already been saved in DivX Player.
135
5. Follow the
instructions in DivX
9. From the Registration screen (Transfer), click Transfer
Video now and select the location of the microSD card or
USB (the device) as the target destination for the
Player to enter the
registration code
from step 2 and
create a device
registration video (created in step 6) and click Start
.
– or –
Locate the created file, copy and paste it into the new drive
letter corresponding to your device’s storage location.
nickname (ex: “Pat or
Pat’s Device”).
10. From the Home screen, tap
Files).
(Applications) ➔
6. Select a location on
your computer to
(
11. Locate your registration DivX video file and tap the file to
play it. Once you play the registration file on your device,
your registration is complete.
download the DivX
registration video
with the same title as
your device nickname (ex: Pat.divx).
12. Return to the DivX VOD Manager screen (from within your
computer’s DivX Player) and confirm both your computer
and your new device appears in the list of registered DivX
devices.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions to download the file and
initiate the transfer process. You will need to place this
video file onto your device and play it back.
8. Connect your device to the computer via USB and transfer
Important!: There is no special registration or configuration necessary to
playback DRM-free DivX movies. Registration of your device is
only required for playback of protected DivX material.
Multimedia
136
4. Use the keypad to enter the required information, then tap
Create Account. Follow the on-screen instructions to
complete your registration.
Media Hub
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie and
TV content. With hundreds of titles available, entertaining your
family on the go was never easier. You can rent or purchase your
favorite content and watch from any location. Featuring the
stunning viewing quality Samsung is known for, Samsung Media
Hub is your gateway to mobile video like you've never
experienced it before.
5. From the My Account screen, you can edit parameters
such as: My Details
Manage My Devices
Using Media Hub
,
My Purchases
,
My Payment Methods,
,
Log out, or Reset Media Hub
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Media Hub).
(Applications) ➔
Note: Media Hub usage is based on service availability.
(
Important!: You must be using an active Wi-Fi/4G connection to preview and
download a media file.
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA) and tap
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.
The internal memory acts as a storage location for your
downloaded rental or purchase.
3. At the Media Hub screen select one of the following
options:
Creating a New Media Hub Account
• What’s new: shows recently added media that is available for rent
or purchase.
Before you can rent or buy media, you must first create an
account. Enter the required information.
• My Media: allows you to view all of the media that you have
1. From the Home screen, tap
Media Hub).
(Applications) ➔
purchased or rented. Touch a media entry to view it.
(
• Movie Store: displays movies that are available for rent or
purchase. Scroll through the movie categories at the top of the
screen. Touch a category and movies of that type display.
2. If prompted, read the End-User License Agreement (EULA)
and tap Accept to continue or Decline to exit.
3. Press
137
and then tap My Account.
• TV Store: displays TV shows that are available for purchase. Scroll
through the movie categories at the top of the screen. Touch a
category and TV shows of that type display.
•
•
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download Media
Content.
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be
viewable on only 1 device in your account.
4. Scroll through the media listings and tap on an item you
would like to purchase or rent.
•
•
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks
where there is a weak signal.
5. Tap WATCH PREVIEW to watch a short preview or tap Rent
or Own
.
•
•
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as a)
license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the Media
Content has been buffered.
6. Choose a payment method and then follow the on-screen
instructions. The media stores to the My Media folder.
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24 consecutive
hours of start of playback.
Media Hub Notices
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after you
create an account in Media Hub.
•
•
Stopping, pausing or restarting rented Media Content does not
extend the available viewing time.
•
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on up
to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to the same
account.
•
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period of
more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis) after
the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin viewing
rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental transaction,
but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented Media Content
may not be available for the entire twenty-four (24) consecutive
hour period if such period would extend the viewable time beyond
the thirty (30) day rental window).
•
•
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more than
once every 90 days.
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as you’d
like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media Content at a
later point in time subject to content re-download availability and
studio permissions.
•
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub
through any output on your mobile phone, including All Share.
•
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you have
acquired through the Service.
Multimedia
138
2. Swipe left or right to browse through your new and
available music. Music, albums, and artists are grouped
into categories.
Music App
Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop, and
playback songs purchased from the Android Market. The music
you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library
and instantly ready to play or download.
3. Tap an on-screen album to open it and begin playback.
4. Return to the Library screen from most other screens in
Registration
the Music application by tapping the Music application
.
icon
(Music notification icon) at the top-left of the
2. Register on Google music site, enter my phone number,
Application bar.
then reboot your device.
Changing Library View
3. Access the new music tab from within your Android Market
You can change the way you view the contents of your library.
application.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Tap
bar to back up to the main Music App menu.
3. Available tabs include: Artists Albums Artists
Playlists, or Genres
(Applications) ➔
The Music application contains a music player that plays music
and other audio files that you copy from your computer.
(
or tab name near the top-left of the Application
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
(Applications) ➔
(
,
,
,
Songs,
The Music app searches both your online library and your
device’s internal storage for music and playlists; this can
take from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on
the amount of new music added since you last opened the
application. It then displays a carousel view of your new
and recent music, organized by album.
.
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid or list view,
depending on the view.
139
Searching for Music in Your Library
Listening to Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in speakers,
through a wired headset, or through a wireless Bluetooth stereo
headset.
(
Music).
2. Press
your available songs.
and then tap
(Search) to search through
Press the volume keys on the side of the device to activate
on-screen volume control, then touch and drag on the scale to
set volume.
– or –
Press
.
Playing Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
(Applications) ➔
3. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.
(
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search
box.
2. Tap a song in your library to listen to it.
– or –
4. Tap a matching song to play it, tap a matching album,
While viewing a list of songs, tap
next to a song and
artist or playlist to view a list of its’ songs.
tap Play
– or –
While viewing a list of albums, artists, playlists, or genres,
the label area under an item and tap Play
.
Changing Music Settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Press
(
Applications) ➔
(
.
and then tap Shuffle all
.
• Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.
The Now playing screen opens and the song you touched
or the first song in the album or playlist starts to play. The
tracks in the current list play in order until you reach the
Multimedia
140
end of the list (unless you choose a repeat option).
Otherwise, playback stops only if you stop it, even when
you switch applications.
Tab Options
There are various options available from the various tabs:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
(Applications) ➔
(
Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the Music
2. Select one of the following tabs and tap
to access an
application, the Now Playing bar appears at the bottom of the screen.
available option.
Displaying the Now Playing Screen
• Artist: Play, Add to playlist, Shop for artist, or Search.
If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return to
the Now playing screen from other Music screens:
• Album: Play, Add to playlist, Shop for artist, or Search
• Songs: Play, Add to playlist, Delete, Shop for artist, More by artist,
or Search.
ᮣ
Tap the name of the current song in the Now Playing bar.
– or –
• Playlist: Play or Edit.
Tap
(Music notification icon) in the System bar, and in
• Genres: Play, Add to playlist, or Search.
the Status Details opens, tap the song title. You can also
pause and resume playback and skip to the next or
previous song in the panel. For more information, refer to
141
Options While Playing a Song
The Now playing screen contains several buttons that you can tap
to control the playback of songs, albums, and playlists:
When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays. There
are various options and controls available while a song is playing:
Taptogobacktotheprevioussong.Touchandhold
to scan backward through the current song.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Tap an album or song.
3. Press Menu) to display the following options:
(Applications) ➔
(
Tap to resume playback
(
Tap to pause playback.
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing
playlist.
Tapto advance to the next song. Touch and hold to
scan forward through the current song.
• Search: Allows you to enter a text string and find a matching song,
artist, or album name.
When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options
songs play in random order. When disabled (as
,
• Show more options: View additional playback features such as
shuffle and repeat.
shown), songs play in the order they appear in List
view.
4. Tap
(
Add to playlist) to add the song to a playlist.
5. Tap
(More options) next to the ARTIST name to view
When Shuffle mode is enabled via Show Options
,
songs related to this artist.
songs play in random order. When enabled, songs
play in random order.
6. Tap
(More options) next to the ALBUM name to view
or play other songs on the album.
Tap to repeatthe current song, repeatall songs, or
disable repeat mode.
Multimedia
142
Creating a Playlist
Playing a Playlist
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Applications) ➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(
Music).
(
Music).
2. Select the Playlists tab.
3. Tap
2. Tap an album or song list and play a song.
3. Press
– or –
Tap
and tap Add to playlist
.
next to a playlist title and tap Play
.
Deleting a Playlist
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
Add to playlist) to add the song to a playlist.
(
Applications) ➔
(
Music).
2. Display the Playlists library view.
3. Tap next to a playlist title and tap Delete
Music
4. Tap the Playlist name field to enter a name for the playlist.
5. Tap OK to save the new playlist.
.
Adding Songs to Playlists
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Tap an album or song list and play a song.
(Applications) ➔
(
Playing Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(
Music). Music player tips display.
2. Tap Done
3. Touch a tab to select the music category: All
Albums, or Artists
4. Scroll through the list and tap an entry to begin playback.
3. Press
– or –
Tap
and tap Add to playlist.
.
,
Playlists,
(
Add to playlist) to add the song to a playlist.
.
4. Select the desired target playlist.
143
Now playing
displays the current song in the player window
Note: The 5.1 channel sound effect works when earphones or sound is
connected through the headset jack only.
Making a Song a Phone Ringtone
1. From the Home screen, tap
5. The following Music Player controls are available:
Pause the song.
(Applications) ➔
(
Music).
Start the song after pausing.
2. Tap the All tab.
Press and hold to rewind the song. Tap to go to
previous song.
3. Touch and hold a song from the list to reveal the
on-screen context menu.
Press and hold to fast-forward the song. Tap to go
to next song.
4. Tap Set as
➔
Phone ringtone.
Volume control.
Music Player Options
5.1Ch
Allows you to listen to music using 5.1 Virtual
Surround Sound.
The Music Player Settings menu allows you to set preferences for
the music player such as whether you want the music to play in
the background, sound effects, and how the music menu
displays.
( ( ) )
Plays the entire song list once.
Replays the current list when the list ends.
Repeats the currently playing song.
shuffles the current list of songs randomly.
songs play in order and are not shuffled.
ᮣ
With the music player application displayed, press
and select one of the following options:
• Add to quick list: adds the selected music file to a quick playlist.
• Via Bluetooth: plays the music through a Bluetooth stereo headset.
• Share music via: shares a music file via AllShare, Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Messaging, or Wi-Fi.
lists the current playlist songs
List
Multimedia
144
• Setas: sets this song as a Phone ringtone, Caller ringtone, or Alarm
4. Backspace over the default playlist title and type a new
name for this playlist, then tap Save
tone.
.
• Add to playlist: adds a song to the playlist.
Adding Music to a Playlist
• More:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to add music.
(Applications) ➔
–
Settings: allows you to activate or deactivate the Equalizer, Effect,
Music menu, or Visualization. The Music menus allow you to decide
what you want to display. Selections are: Albums, Artists, Genres,
Folders, Composers, Years, Most played, Recently played, or Recently
added. Touch each item that you want to display in the Music menu.
(
–
–
Details: displays details about the selected music.
4. Press
– or –
Tap
and then tap Add.
Stop playing music: stops playing the currently selected song or
playlist.
Using Playlists
(
Add music).
Playlists are used to assign music files into groups for playback.
These Playlists can be created using the Music player on this
device, or using a third-party application (such as Windows
Media Player) and downloading those files to an SD card inserted
into the device.
Note: If a playlist is empty, add a song by touching a holding a song name
from the main screen to open the context menu. Select Add to playlist
.
5. Tap a music file, or tap Select all to add all the music tracks
to this playlist then tap Add
.
Creating a Playlist
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
3. Press and then tap Create
(Applications) ➔
(
.
145
Removing Music from a Playlist
5. Enter a new name for this playlist and tap Save.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Transferring Music Files
Music files can be downloaded to the phone using one of two
methods:
(
Music).
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
1. Downloaded to the phone from or Android Market.
3. Tap the playlist name in which to delete music.
Music files are directly stored on your phone.
4. Touch and hold a song to reveal the on-screen context
2. Downloaded to the phone via a direct USB connection.
menu.
Music files are stored into a Music folder on the SD card.
5. Tap Remove
➔
OK.
Editing a Playlist
Besides adding and removing music files in a playlist, you can
also share, delete, or rename the playlist.
Removing Music Files
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Tap the All tab.
(Applications) ➔
Only those playlist you have created can be edited. Default
playlists can not be renamed.
(
1. From the Home screen, tap
Music).
2. Tap the Playlists tab.
(Applications) ➔
3. Touch and hold a song entry to reveal the on-screen
(
context menu.
4. Tap Delete
➔
OK. The music file(s) is deleted.
3. Touch and hold a playlist entry to reveal the on-screen
context menu.
4. Tap Edit title
.
Multimedia
146
5. Tap any of the following categories to begin viewing:
Live TV On Demand My Media More Info Browse, or Live
Channels
YouTube
T-Mobile TV
T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and
Video on Demand.
,
,
,
,
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(T-Mobile TV). The T-Mobile Terms and Conditions
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
page displays.
1. From the Home screen, tap
YouTube).
2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions, or
touch Exit
(Applications) ➔
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
(
contact your service provider for further details.
2. Tap Accept if you accept the Terms and Conditions.
– or –
.
3. When the screen loads you can begin searching and
Tap Exit to close the application.
viewing posted videos.
4. Press
➔
Settings
➔
High quality on mobile if you
Note: T-Mobile TV must be initialized over a cellular network before it can be
used. During this initial registration process, any current Wi-Fi
connections must be disabled.
prefer high quality output.
3. Tap Disable Wi-Fi if you currently have an active Wi-Fi
connection.
4. Tap Start Trial to begin a free 30-day trial of the service.
147
Section 9: Applications and Development
This section outlines the various applications that are available
on your phone.
Accounts and sync
This application allows you to configure general synchronization
settings that determine whether the background data is
synchronized, and whether you automatically synchronize data
with the phone.
Applications
The Applications list provides quick access to all the available
applications on the phone.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Accounts and sync).
(Applications) ➔
Application, its function, and how to navigate through that
particular application. If the application is already described in
another section of this user manual, then a cross reference to
that particular section is provided.
(
411 & More
Provides more than just single tap access to directory assistance
and other portals. Available categories include: 411 Directory
Assistance, Current Weather, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
411 & More).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Tap an on-screen option and follow the on-screen
prompts. Choices include: 411 Directory Assistance,
Current Weather, Horoscopes and Sports Report.
Applications and Development
148
Configuring AllShare Settings
AllShare
This application wirelessly synchronizes your Samsung mobile
phone with your TV, streams content and even keeps tabs on
who calls or sends text messages with real-time, on-screen
monitoring. Samsung’s AllShare makes staying connected easy.
The AllShare™ application must first be configured prior to its
initial use. You must setup parameters such as connected Wi-FI,
Items to share, source server address, and external device
acceptance rights.
1. From the Home screen, tap
AllShare).
and then tap Settings and configure the
(Applications) ➔
Allows users to share their in-device media content with other
external devices using DLNA certified™ (Digital Living Network
Alliance) Devices. These external devices must also be DLNA-
compliant. Wi-Fi capability can be provided to TVs via a digital
multimedia streamer.
(
2. Press
following settings as desired:
• Device name: defaults to your phone. Use the keypad to enter a
new Media server if desired, and tap Save
.
• Share video/picture/audio: allows you to restrict what is shared
from your phone. Tap the items you want to share.
1. From the Home screen, tap
AllShare).
2. Follow the on-screen prompts.
(Applications) ➔
• Upload from other devices: allows you set the phone to select
(
how uploads from other devices are started. Tap Always accept
,
Always ask, or Always reject
.
• Default memory: allows you to have media saved to your Phone or
The application contains two separate streaming media options:
Memory Card. Tap an option.
• My device allows you to stream/share selected multimedia content
from your device to DLNA compliant device connected to the same
WAP.
• Subtitles: allows you to see subtitles on shared media.
Depending on the setting you changed, a pop-up screen
may display to restart AllShare. Tap Yes to continue.
• Remote device allows you to receive and playback media stored
externally (server, laptop, etc.) directly on your device.
149
Transmitting Media via AllShare
Blio
1. Tap the My device tab, select Videos Photos, or Music, and
,
Blio is an eReading application that presents eBooks just like the
printed version, in full color, and with all of the features you’d
want from an eReader.
then tap on the media that you would like to share.
2. At the Select device screen, any devices that you can share
1. From the Home screen, tap
Blio).
2. Read the on-screen welcome information and tap Close
3. Tap an available on-screen option and follow the prompts.
Choose from: Get Shop Search, and Read
Bonus Apps
(Applications) ➔
with are displayed.
(
3. Tap on a device to share media.
.
Receiving Media via AllShare
1. Tap the Remote device tab at the top of the screen.
,
,
.
All devices that you can receive media from are displayed.
2. Tap a device name. Media that you can receive from the
Provides the procedures necessary to install the T-Mobile Bonus
Apps Widget that allows you to discover those applications that
are compatible specifically with your phone.
other device is listed.
•
Tap an item that you want to stream to your phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Bonus Apps).
2. Read the Widget installation and tap OK
3. Once installed, locate the Widget on your screen and tap
Launch
4. Follow the on-screen prompts.
(Applications) ➔
3. Press
to return to the previous page.
(
Asphalt 6
.
Provides access to a built-in HD video game.
1. From the Home screen, tap Applications) ➔
Asphalt 6).
2. Follow the on-screen prompts.
(
.
(
Applications and Development
150
Books
Calculator
Use Google Books to read over 3 million ebooks on the go.
Using this feature you can use the phone as a calculator. The
calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions; addition,
subtraction, multiplication, and division. You can also use this as
a scientific calculator.
Build your ebooks library in the cloud with Google Books: jump
right into a bestseller or select from nearly 3 million free ebooks.
Personalize the reader to your liking, pick up reading where you
left off on your phone or computer, and settle down with a great
book on your Android phone!
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Calculator).
(Applications) ➔
(
(
1. From the Home screen, tap
Books).
(Applications) ➔
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.
(
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by tapping the Plus,
2. If prompted, tap Turn sync on. This synchronizes your
books you have previously selected between your Books
account and your device.
Minus, Multiplication, or Division key.
4. Enter the next number.
5. To view the result, tap the
=
(equals) key.
3. Tap
ebooks.
to begin searching for both free and paid
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 as many times as required.
4. Follow the on-screen prompts to download the ebook to
Note: Place the screen in Landscape mode to reveal additional scientific
functions.
your phone.
151
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or
Calendar
an individual event.
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a
reminder. Google Calendar is built into the phone and
synchronizes both new and existing entries between your phone
and your online Google account.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
To manually sync calendar events:
1. Press
sync
➔
and then tap
➔
Accounts and
Important!: You must have previously added an account (Facebook, Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync, or Google) prior to using the Calendar.
.
2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
synchronize.
(
Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:
3. Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
• Month: displays the Month view.
• Week: displays the Week view.
• Day: displays the Day view.
account’s synchronization settings screen.
4. Tap Sync Calendar to activate the synchronization of
calendar events between your device and the remote
exchange server. A green checkmark indicates the feature
is enabled.
• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,
or Day, or you can look for events for a future date.
2. Press
and select one of the following options:
• Create: creates a new Event.
Contacts
• Go to: displays a specific date.
The default storage location for saving phone numbers to your
Contacts List is your phone’s built-in memory.
• Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting
the date.
• Search: allows you to search within current events.
Applications and Development
152
Camera
Downloads
Use your 8.0 megapixel camera feature to produce photos in a JPEG
format. The Camcorder shoots High Definition video in an MP4
format.
Provides quick access to tabs containing a list of your current
downloaded files (Internet and Other).
1. From the Home screen, tap
Downloads).
(Applications) ➔
(
Note: An SD card must be inserted before the Camera will take and store
photos.
2. Tap an available file category tab (Internet downloads or
Other downloads) and select the desired file. Compatible
document formats can be opened by Polaris Office
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Camera).
(Applications) ➔
(
Email
Clocks
Email enables you to review and create email using most email
services. The device alerts you when you receive an email
message.
Here you can set an alarm, configure and view the World clock,
use a stopwatch, or set a timer. The applications display in a
tabular format and quickly accessed with the touch of a finger.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Clock).
(Applications) ➔
(
Files
Organize and store data, images, and more in your own personal
file folders. Files are stored to the memory card in separate (user
defined) folders.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Files).
(Applications) ➔
(
153
Gallery
Google Search
The Gallery is where you view photos and play back videos. For
photos, you can also perform basic editing tasks, view a
slideshow, set photos as wallpaper or caller image, and share as
a picture message.
Google Search is a web-based search engine that uses
text-based queries to search for content on web pages.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(
Google Search) and enter the search text.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Gallery).
(Applications) ➔
– or –
Tap
(
on the Google Search bar and say the search
Google Mail
Google Mail (Gmail) is a web-based email service. Gmail is
configured when you first set up your phone. Depending on your
synchronization settings, Gmail can automatically synchronize
with your Gmail account on the web.
IM
Instant Messaging allows you to send and receive instant
messages using Windows Live Messenger, Google Talk, or Yahoo!
Messenger communities.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Gmail).
(Applications) ➔
(
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
IM).
(Applications) ➔
(
Applications and Development
154
Kies air
Latitude
Kies air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your
phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You
can view and share call logs, videos, photos, music, bookmarks,
ringtones, and even send SMS messages from your PC.
Google Latitude allows you and your friends share locations and
status messages with each other. It also lets you send instant
messages and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to
your friends’ locations.
Important!: You must sign in to your Google account, enable Wi-Fi, and
enable the Location feature before you can use this application.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Kies air).
(Applications) ➔
(
Note: Although you do not have to enable location services in order to use
Latitude, it is recommended for best accuracy.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Latitude).
(Applications) ➔
(
Important!: For best results, it is recommended that you enable all of your
2. Tap Wi-Fi Disabled - Click to enable connection to navigate
to the Wi-Fi Settings menu where you can turn on Wi-Fi if it
is not already enabled.
155
Sharing your Location with Friends
Latitude Options
1. From the Latitude map screen, tap
to display your
ᮣ
From the map display, press
options:
to display the following
Latitude friends. At first, only your name is displayed.
2. Press Add friends
3. Tap Select from Contacts or Add via email address
4. Tap a contact or enter an email address, then tap
Add friends
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.
➔
.
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a
starting point.
.
• My Places: allows you to see locations you have marked as a
favorite such as restaurants, museums, parks, and so forth. Press
and hold on a location and when the screen displays with the
address, tap the star in the upper-right corner. It will be listed in your
Starred Places.
.
5. Tap Yes at the Send sharing requests prompt.
Your friend will receive an email or text message with your
location marked on a map. They will also receive
• Clear Map: allows you to remove all markings and layers from the
map.
instructions on how to view your location from the web or
use Latitude on their phone or tablet provided it is
available. Once they acknowledge your request, their
location will display on your tablet. They can share their
location from their computer, phone, or tablet. For more
• Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status
messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages
and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’
locations.
• More: allows you to select the following additional options:
–
Labs: this is a testing ground for experimental features that aren’t ready
for primetime. They may change, break or disappear at any time. Click
on a Lab to enable or disable it.
information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude
.
6. To view the map, press See map
➔
.
–
–
Cache Settings: allows you to set options to pre-fetch map tiles when
not using Wi-Fi and to clear the cache that holds the map tiles.
Help: displays the Google Mobile Help web page where you can receive
help on Google Maps.
Applications and Development
156
–
–
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy
Policy, o r Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from
the pop-up menu.
5. Read the on-screen information about Backup and if
desired, tap the Enable Backup field to activate the feature.
6. Tap Next
.
About: displays general information about Google maps such as
Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free
memory, etc.
7. Read the on-screen information about the feature that can
help locate your missing phone and if desired, tap
New user (to setup a new account) or Existing user (to log
into your account field to activate the feature).
Lookout
Lookout™ provides mobile device-specific security features that
are coupled with a minimal performance hit. Lookout Mobile
Security provides key security options that are unique to the
mobile market. Along with the antivirus and anti-malware tech,
there's a lost and stolen phone locator service, an application
privacy adviser, and a backup service.
8. Tap Start Lookout
.
From the main application, the main features are presented as
buttons. Tap one to reveal a button that will run the feature.
Maps
1. From the Home screen, tap
Lookout).
(Applications) ➔
Google Maps allow you to track your current location, view
real-time traffic issues, and view detailed destination directions.
There is also a search tool included to help you locate places of
interest or a specific address. You can view locations on a vector
or aerial map, or you can view locations at the street level.
(
2. Read the on-screen descriptions and tap Get started to
begin your configuration.
3. Read the on-screen information about Security and if
desired, tap the Enable Security field to activate the
feature.
Important!: Before using Google Maps you must have an active data (3G/4G)
or Wi-Fi connection. The Maps application does not cover every
country or city.
4. Tap Next
.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Maps).
(Applications) ➔
(
157
Important!: For best results, it is recommended that you enable all of your
Tip: When using Google Maps you can turn on Enable GPS satellites.
Selecting GPS satellites allows you to locate places of interest at the
street-level. However, this also requires a clear view of the sky and uses
more battery power.
Enabling a Location source
Opening Maps
Before you use Google Maps and find your location or search for
places of interest, you must enable a location source. To enable
the location source you must enable the wireless network, or
enable the GPS satellites.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Maps).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Locate the top row of the applications to access additional
options:
Important!: The more location determining functions are enabled, the more
accurate the determination will be of your position.
• Search Maps: allows you to search for a place of interest.
• Places: provides access to the places menu where you can quickly
locate a business or person, find out more information about a
Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants, Coffee, Bars,
Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, Explore Nearby, or Add your own
place.) A list of places within this category displays.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Location and security
.
2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable GPS to determine
location based on nearby cell towers.
• Layers: allows you to switch map views:
3. Tap Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.
–
Traffic: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic conditions are
displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color represents how
fast the traffic is moving.
4. Tap Use sensor aiding to enhance positioning and save
power using sensors.
–
Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth. Satellite
images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best imagery
available, most of which is approximately one to three years old.
Applications and Development
158
–
Terrain: combines a topographical view of the area’s terrain with the
current map location.
• More
:
–
Labs: a testing ground for experimental features that are not ready to
–
–
Transit Lines: displays the overlapping transit lines on your map.
use publically.
Latitude: allows you to see your friend's locations and share your
location with them.
–
Cache Settings: provides the ability to setup maps that are cached into
the phone’s memory (while not on a Wi-Fi connection) or to clear the
cache of map titles.
–
–
–
–
My Maps: displays a list of your preferred maps.
–
–
Help: uses the browser to display a searchable Google Mobile Help
screen.
Bicycling: displays the overlapping cycling trails on your map.
Wikipedia: displays any Wikipedia markers and info on your map.
Terms, Privacy & Notices: displays the Terms and Conditions, Privacy
Policy, or Legal Notices information. Select the desired information from
the pop-up menu.
Buzz: allows you post public messages and photos at a location for
everyone to see.
• My Location: when touched, the location displays on the map with
a blinking blue dot.
–
About: displays general information about Google maps such as
Version, Platform, Locale, Total data sent, Total data received, Free
memory, etc.
3. Press
and select one of the following options:
• Search: allows you to search for a place of interest.
Market
• Directions: displays navigation directions to a location from a
Android Market provides access to downloadable applications
and games to install on your phone. Android Market also allows
you to provide feedback and comments about an application, or
flag an application that might be incompatible with your phone.
starting point.
• My Places: marks favorite locations on the map. These items are
automatically synchronized with maps.
• Clear Map: after viewing or following directions, this option resets
the map.
• Latitude: lets you and your friends share locations and status
messages with each other. It also lets you send instant messages
and emails, make phone calls, and get directions to your friends’
locations.
159
Accessing the Market
1. From the Home screen, tap
Important!: If the selected application requires access to data or control of a
function on your phone, Market displays the information the
application will access.
(Applications) ➔
(
Market).
Tap OK if you agree to the conditions of the application. Once you
tap OK on this screen you are responsible for using this
application on the phone and the amount of data it uses. Use this
feature with caution.
2. If not already logged in with your Google account, tap Next
.
3. Tap Sign in and enter your Google account information.
4. Tap Accept to agree to the Android Market terms of
4. Tap Install
.
service.
Note: Use caution with applications which request access to any personal
data, functions, or significant amounts of data usage times.
Downloading a New Google Application
5. If prompted, follow the on-screen instructions to pay for
To download a new application, you will need to use your Google
account to sign in to Android Market. The Android Market home
page provides several ways to find applications. The home page
features applications and includes a list of item applications by
category, a list of games, a link to search, and a link to My apps.
the application.
6. Check the progress of the current download by opening
the Notifications panel.
7. After the item is downloaded and installed on your phone,
1. From the Home screen, tap
Market).
(Applications) ➔
the content download icon
appears in the
(
notification area of the status bar.
2. Browse through the categories, find an application you're
8. On the Android Market screen, press
My apps, tap the installed application in the list, and then
tap Open
and then tap
interested in, and tap the name.
.
3. Read the application descriptions.
Applications and Development
160
Unknown sources
Tip: The newly downloaded applications display in the applications list and
are shown in alphabetical order if the View Type is set to Alphabetical
grid or Alphabetical list, or at the end of the list if View type is set to
Customizable grid.
This feature can be used for Android application development.
The feature allows developers to install non-Market applications.
1. Press
Applications
➔
and then tap
Unknown sources
(Settings) ➔
➔
.
Note: A data plan is required to use this feature. Charges may apply. Please
contact your service provider for further details.
Unknown sources displays a check mark to indicate it is
active.
Launching an Installed Google Application
Manage applications
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications).
This feature allows you to manage and remove installed
applications. You can also view the amount of memory or
resources used as well as the remaining memory and resources
for each of the applications on your phone and clear the data,
cache, or defaults.
2. Tap the newly installed application. This application is
typically located on the last Applications page.
Android Development
This device can be used for Android application development.
You can write applications in the SDK and install them on this
device, then run the applications using the hardware, system,
and network.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Applications
➔
Manage applications
.
Clearing application cache and data
Warning!: Android Dev Phones are not intended for non-developer
end-users. Because the device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
1. Press
Applications
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
➔
Manage applications
.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3. Tap Force stop Clear data Clear cache, or Clear defaults.
,
,
161
Uninstalling third-party applications
3. Compose the memo.
4. Tap Save
You can uninstall any application you downloaded and installed
from Android Market.
.
1. Press
Applications
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Memo options
1. While viewing the list of Memos, press
➔
Manage applications.
and select
2. Tap the third-party application, and from the Application
info screen, tap Uninstall
Media Hub
From the Home screen, tap
Media Hub).
one of the following options:
.
• Create: allows you to create a memo.
• Delete: allows you to delete one or more memos.
ᮣ
(Applications) ➔
• Search: allows you to search within the current set of memos.
(
• Send: allows you to send one or several of your memos at one
time. Select a memo and tap send to deliver it via: Bluetooth, Email,
Messaging, or Wi-Fi.
Memo
• Sort by: allows you to sort by Date or Color.
This feature allows you to create a memo.
• More: provides the following options:
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Memo).
2. Tap Create memo
(Applications) ➔
–
–
–
SNS log in: allows you to log into your Facebook, Twitter, or LinkedIn
accounts.
(
(
Sync memo: allows you to sync your memos Google Docs or send
individual memos.
.
PIN lock: allows you to set a PIN lock so that a PIN must be entered
before reading a memo.
Note: If this is your first memo, you are automatically taken to the new memo
screen.
Applications and Development
162
2. Touch and hold the memo then select Send and choose the
method to send this memo: Bluetooth Email Messaging or
Wi-Fi
Mini Diary
,
,
This application allows you to create a mini diary where you can
add a photo, and text to describe an event or other memorable
life event.
.
3. From the memo list, touch the upper-left edit button and
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Mini Diary). Any diary entries display in a
list.
(Applications) ➔
select a color for the memo’s background, then tap Save
.
(
(
Messaging
This application allows you to use the Short Message Service
(SMS) to send and receive short text messages to and from other
mobile phones.
2. If prompted, tap Yes to allow required network
connectivity.
3. Tap the Tap to add photo field to add a photo for this diary
You can also use the Multi Media Service (MMS) to create
multimedia messages to send and receive from other mobile
phones.
event and touch the source. Selections are: Camera, or
Gallery
4. Tap the Add location area of the screen, enter text, then tap
Done
5. Tap the Tap to add text area of the screen and enter text
then tap Done
.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Messaging).
(Applications) ➔
(
.
.
6. Tap the weather data icon in the upper, right corner (above
the photo) and select a weather condition from the list to
describe the weather conditions for this entry.
7. Tap Save
.
163
Mini Diary settings
1. From the Home screen, tap
• Change photo: replaces the photo in this entry by allowing you to
take another photo or use another image.
(Applications) ➔
• Delete photo: deletes the photo from this entry when you touch Yes
to confirm.
(
Utility) ➔
2. From the main Diary listings page, press
tap Settings
(Mini Diary).
and then
• More: provides additional options such as: Publish (SNS service
such as Facebook) and Send via (to deliver the entry via either Email
or Messaging).
.
3. Tap Auto update if you want the settings to automatically
More for Me
update.
Provides customized offers, discounts and deals right to your
phone by providing some brief customer and location
information. The application uses your current location to bring
you the best deals in your area.
Deleting a Mini Diary entry
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔
2. Press
(Applications) ➔
(
.
Initial Setup
and then tap Delete all
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
More for Me).
(Applications) ➔
Mini Diary options
1. From the Home screen, tap
(
(Applications) ➔
2. Read the on-screen information and configure the
(
Utility) ➔
2. Select a diary.
3. Press and select one of the following options:
• Create: creates a new diary entry.
.
necessary options such as: Gender, Age, and agreements.
3. Tap Continue to complete the setup process.
• Delete: deletes the displayed entry.
• Edit: allows you to edit the current diary entry.
Applications and Development
164
Using the More for Me Application
Music
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
This application allows you to play music files that you have
stored on your microSD card. You can also create playlists.
(More for Me).
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Music).
(Applications) ➔
2. Access an available tab for more options:
(
• Just for Me: displays a listing of current offers available
within your current area.
• All Deals: Provides you with common categories to choose from,
such as: Food & Drinks, Health & Beauty, Retail & Service,
Activities, Events, Other, and All nearby.
My Account
This option provides you with account specific information such
as your current activity, billing information, and Plan Services
information. You can also set alerts for minute or message usage,
payment reminder, or power saver.
• My Deals: displays a list of previously redeemed offers.
• Settings: Provides access to configuration settings such as: Get
Better Deals, Connect with Facebook, and Terms & Conditions.
Music App
Note: You may be prompted to log into the Android Market to receive the
latest version of the T-Mobile My Account application.
Also known as Google Music, allows you to browse, shop, and
playback songs purchased from the Android Market. The music
you choose is automatically stored in your Google Music library
and instantly ready to play or download.
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
• My Account: check Activity, set Alerts and Events, review Billing,
and review your current Plan and services.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Music).
(Applications) ➔
• MyDevice: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage
& Battery.
(
Tip: Use the Menu key to toggle between My Account and My Device.
165
–
–
Payment Reminder: alerts when your bill is due.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My Account).
2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK
(Applications) ➔
Power Saver: sends an alert when the battery level reaches 30
percent. The alert displays in the notification window. This alert is
(
.
automatically set to On
.
• Recent Oder Status: Displays details about your recent orders.
The initial screen displays four tabs: Activity, Set Alerts, Billing,
and Plan.
• Account Events: provides details about your recent account
events.
Activity
Billing
The Activity tab displays your current minute and message
activity. You can view what percentage of minutes were used as
well as the number of messages used for a particular start date.
This provides a billing summary.
Plan
Alerts and Events
This screen displays specific information and charges for your
current plan and services. The screen also displays additional
services information and charges. Included categories include:
My plan & services, Additional Services, and T-Mobile Offers.
From this screen you can activate alerts to notify you of the
following:
• Alert Settings: sets when you would receive alerts for the following:
My Device
–
Minute Usage: tracks the number of minutes used and remaining in
your plan. Minute Usage Reminder: sends an alert when the number of
minutes used reaches 75 percent of the total available minutes in the
plan. Over Limit Alert: sends an alert when usage exceeds your plan’s
total available minutes.
Use the My Device application to configure device settings, view
support information, personalize your CallerTunes, Ringtones, or
Wallpapers, or view battery storage information.
1. From the Home screen, tap
My Device).
2. Read the on-screen information and tap OK
(Applications) ➔
–
–
Message Usage: tracks the number of messages used and remaining
in your plan. If you plan includes unlimited messages this setting does
not apply.
(
.
Data Usage: tracks data used and remaining in your plan. If you plan
includes unlimited data usage this setting does not apply.
Applications and Development
166
Support
Tip: Use the Menu key (
) to toggle between My Account and My Device.
Displays support information My Account Feedback, T-Mobile
®
Forums, T-Mobile on Twitter, and T-Mobile Tech Assist™.
The differences between My Account and My Device are these:
• My Account: check Activity, set Alerts and Events, review Billing,
and review your current Plan and services.
Storage & Battery
From this tab you can view Memory storage information for the
phone or memory card. You can also view the battery level
percentage and other information.
• MyDevice: Personalize settings, Quick Tools, Support, and Storage
& Battery.
The initial screen displays four tabs: Personalize, Quick Tools,
Support, and Storage Battery.
Navigation
Google Maps Navigation (Beta) is an internet-connected
turn-by-turn, GPS navigation system with voice guidance.
Personalize
Using this menu you can personalize CallerTunes, Ringtone, and
Wallpapers.
Caution!: Traffic data is not real-time and directions may be wrong,
dangerous, prohibited, or involve ferries.
• CallerTunes: allows you to choose songs for your callers to hear.
• Ringtones: you can personalize your phone’s ringtones by
choosing from recordings, voices, and more.
Important!: To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the
following conditions:
• Wallpapers: you can personalize your phone’s background by
selecting wallpapers from the Shop, Gallery, Live Wallpapers, and
the Wallpaper Gallery.
- inside a building or between buildings
- in a tunnel or underground passage
- in poor weather
- around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields
- in a vehicle with tinted windows
Quick Tools
Quick Tools is a shortcut that allows you to view and configure
the following features and parameters: Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Data
Roaming, GPS, Brightness, Screen Timeout, and Phone Info.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Navigation).
(Applications) ➔
(
167
Enabling GPS Location
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
• Driving/Walking: configures the method of travel. Selection of
Walking would negate the need to track traffic jams and
obstructions.
Location and security
2. Tap Use wireless networks. A green check mark indicates
the GPS location feature has been enhanced by using Wi-Fi
and/or mobile networks to increase accuracy.
–
Driving mode enables the Settings feature: allows you to configure
your Route options such as: Avoid highways or Avoid tolls
• Maps: enables the on-screen real-time map functionality.
.
• Speak Destination: allows you to use the voice recognition feature
3. Tap Use GPS satellites. A green check mark indicates the
to search for matching locations in your area.
GPS location feature is enabled.
• Type Destination: allows you to manually enter a destination
address (via the on-screen keypad).
4. Tap Use sensor aiding. A green check mark indicates the
phone is enhancing its positioning ability and save power
by using sensors.
• Contacts: allows you to receive turn-by-turn directions to the
address stored for a selected Contacts entry.
• Starred Places: allows you to obtain directions to locations that
Navigation options
Navigation Map options
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
(Navigation).
The navigation application can be configured from the
main screen.
Once on the map screen, you can access the following features:
•
•
•
Destination: returns you to the previous Navigation options screen.
Search by voice: Speak your destination instead of typing.
Layers: allows you to switch map views:
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap Accept
.
• Traffic view: (available only in selected areas) Real-time traffic
conditions are displayed over roads as color-coded lines. Each color
represents how fast the traffic is moving.
Applications and Development
168
• Satellite: Maps uses the same satellite data as Google Earth.
Satellite images are not real-time. Google Earth acquires the best
imagery available, most of which is approximately one to three
years old.
Caution!: Navigation is a beta product. Use caution.
Netflix
• Parking: displays parking information relative to your current
location.
Netflix is a service offering online streaming service that allows
you to watch TV Shows & Movies directly on your phone.
• Gas Stations: displays gas station location relative to your current
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
location.
(
Netflix). If prompted to update, follow the on-screen
• ATMs & Banks: displays ATM and Bank locations relative to your
current location.
prompts.
2. Enter the Email and Password associated with your current
• Restaurants: displays restaurant and eatery locations relative to
your current location.
Netflix account.
Press
to access additional options:
3. Follow the on-screen prompts to use the application.
•
Search: manually search for a destination address, place, name of
business, or even a type of business.
Note: It is recommended that this service be used in conjunction with an
•
Set Destination: returns you to the navigation options screen where
you can access a destination by either Speaking, Typing, or selecting
from a Contacts entry or Starred Place.
active Wi-Fi connection.
•
•
Layers: allows you to switch map views. See previous description.
Mute: allows you to mute the audio readout and directional
information.
•
•
Exit Navigation: terminates the application.
More: provides additional application information such as: Help and
Terms, Privacy & Notices.
169
To access the settings:
1. Press and then tap Settings
2. Tap an available option: Weather settings
Refresh settings, and Application version
Photo Editor
This application provides basic editing functions for pictures that
you take on your phone. Along with basic image tuning like
brightness, contrast, and color it also provides a wide variety of
effects used for editing the picture.
News & Weather
The News & Weather application allows you to view the news
and weather in your area.
.
,
News settings,
1. From the Home screen, tap
News & Weather).
2. Select from any of the available tabs: Weather
U.S., Sports, and Entertainment
(Applications) ➔
.
(
,
Top Stories,
.
3. Tap the temperature to display a graph mapping the days
temperature and humidity.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Photo editor).
(Applications) ➔
4. While on the Weather screen, press
to display the
(
following options:
• Refresh: allows you to refresh the screen. Your location and the
weather is updated if there have been any changes.
• Settings: allows you to set weather, news, and refresh settings.
–
Weather settings: allows you to choose location(s) and set the metric
for temperature displays.
–
News settings: allows you to choose topics, configure settings for
fetching articles and images, and view the terms of service for news
service.
–
–
Refresh settings: allows you to choose options for updating content.
Application version: displays the application version number.
Applications and Development
170
5. Press
and then tap Latitude. The functions of this
Places
application are similar to those of the Navigation
application, but work along with the Latitude service
where you can share your location with your chosen
Google friends.
Google Places displays company logos on a layer of Google
Maps. When viewing an area you can quickly locate a business
or person, find out more information about the business, see
coupons, public responses, and more.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Places).
(Applications) ➔
Polaris Office
(
Polaris Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office compatible
office suite. This application provides a central place for
managing your documents online or offline.
2. Use the Find places field to manually enter a desired place
or choose from among the various categories. Matches are
filtered by those closest to your current location.
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable Document
Format) files.
3. Locate and tap one of the listed places (Restaurants,
Coffee, Bars, Attractions, ATMs, Gas Stations, Explore
Nearby, or Add your own place.) A list of places within this
category displays.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Polaris Office).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Read the registration information and enter your Name and
– or –
Email information (if desired).
Press
and then tap either Starred Places or My Maps.
3. Tap Later to ignore this registration or Register to complete
the process.
4. Tap the Maps icon (upper-right) to launch the related maps
4. Read the End User License Agreement, then tap Accept if
feature.
you agree with the terms of use.
171
5. On its initial launch, tap an available tab:
Settings
• New: creates a new office document.
This icon navigates to the sound and phone settings for your
phone. It includes such settings as: display, security, memory,
and any extra settings associated with your phone.
• My Files: This is where you keep your documents on this device.
You can manage documents, or send them to others, and upload
the documents.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
• Recent docs: provides a list of recently opened documents.
(
Settings).
You can also share your documents to others without using email
attachments.
.
– or –
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings).
• Search: allows you to search for document files by using a text
string.
Pro Apps
Slacker
Provides access to compatible productivity tools. These
productivity packs can be accessed from anywhere.
Slacker offers free, internet radio for mobile phones.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Slacker).
(Applications) ➔
Note: Access to these applications and packs requires you have an active
(
Google account and are logged in prior to connection.
Important!: You must register and create a free account prior to using this
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
service.
(Pro Apps).
2. If prompted, enter your Email address and password.
– or –
•
Select an application and follow the on-screen download
and installation instructions.
Tap Create Account if you have not created an account.
Applications and Development
172
3. Begin selecting the music you want to listen to.
7. From the Social Hub main screen, tap the Feeds or
Messages tabs to see information pertaining to your
account.
Social Hub
Allows you to easily and intuitively satisfy all of your
communication needs from within a single-user interface.
E-mails, instant messaging, social network contents, and
calendar contents from all major service providers are available.
8. To add another account, press
➔
Add account.
T-Mobile Mall
This downloadable application provides access to several phone
features and tunes.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
(Social Hub). The Welcome to Social Hub page
1. From the Home screen, tap
T-Mobile Mall).
2. Read the on-screen disclaimer and tap I agree
(Applications) ➔
describes all of the available features.
(
2. Tap Setup now to setup your Social Hub account.
.
3. Tap on an account type that you would like to setup.
Choose from either email accounts, SNS accounts, or other
IM accounts.
3. Read the legal disclaimer screen and tap Yes to agree or
No to disagree to its terms.
4. Tap OK to complete the activation process.
4. If you choose an SNS account, read the SNS disclaimer,
tap the I accept all the terms above checkbox, then tap
Agree to continue.
5. Review the on-screen options such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Recommended
Song recommendations
Ringtones
CallerTunes
Applications
5. Tap Next
.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions for adding an account.
Games
173
Turning on the NFC feature:
T-Mobile Name ID
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
(
Applications) ➔
NFC
Allows you to modify the on-screen Caller ID information. Name
ID identifies unknown callers by Name, City, and State.
(
Settings) ➔ Wireless and network
➔
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
T-Mobile Name ID).
(Applications) ➔
Talk
(
You can instant message with Google Talk. Google Talk allows
you to communicate with other people who are also connected
with Google Talk on the phone or on the web.
2. Choose an on-screen option.
T-Mobile TV
T-Mobile TV is an application that allows you to get live TV and
Video on Demand.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Talk).
(Applications) ➔
(
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
T-Mobile TV).
(Applications) ➔
(
Task
Allows you to keep track of both your current and upcoming
tasks. You can also sync these tasks with different accounts.
Tags
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Task).
(Applications) ➔
This application is used for organizing and sharing Near Field
Communication (NFC) tags. You can scan a tag by turning on your
device and placing it near the tag. For more information, refer to
(
(
2. Tap Create task to start a new task entry.
3. Tap the Name field and enter a task name using the
1. From the Home screen, tap
Tags).
(Applications) ➔
keypad.
(
2. Read the on-screen tutorial screen and follow the
navigation instructions.
Applications and Development
174
4. Tap the Due date field and enter a due date name using the
keypad. If there is no date that the task is due, tap the No
due date checkbox.
Task Manager
Sometimes your phone might seem to slow down over time, and the
biggest reason for this are background applications. These are
applications that were not properly closed or shutdown and are still
active but minimized. The Task Manager not only lets you see which
of theseapplications are still activein the background but also easily
lets you choose which applications are left running and which are
closed.
5. If desired, enter Task
,
Priority
,
Reminder, and Notes then
tap Save
.
6. At the Task list screen, press
to display the following
options:
Shutting Down Applications
• Create: allows you to create a new task.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Task Manager).
(Applications) ➔
• Delete: allows you to delete one or all of your tasks.
(
• Search: allows you to search your tasks for a particular word or
words.
– or –
Press and hold
• List by: allows you to sort by Due date, Status, or Priority.
then tap Task Manager. This screen
• Sync Task: allows you to sync your tasks to any of your accounts.
contains the following tabs:
From the Task list screen, tap a task once you have completed it
and a checkmark appears next to the task. The task name is also
grayed out so that you can still read it.
• Active applications display those currently active applications
running on your phone.
• Downloaded displays any installed packages or applications from
the Market that are taking up memory space. Tap Uninstall to
remove them from your phone.
• RAM, displays the amount of current RAM (Random Access
Memory) currently being used and allow you to Clear memory
.
175
• Storage displays a visual graph indicating the available and used
space within the System storage location, USB storage SD card
location and Battery monitor
Utility
,
This application houses some of the most commonly used utility
applications such as: Calculator, Memo, Minidiary, Task, Videos,
and Voice Recorder.
.
• Help provides additional battery saving techniques.
7. From the Active applications tab, tap Exit to close selected
applications or tap Exit all to close all background running
applications.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Tap an available application to begin its use.
TeleNav GPS
TeleNav GPS Navigator is a driving aid that uses both audible and
visual directions for GPS navigation.
3. Refer to the particular application’s instructions for more
information:
1. From the Home screen, tap
TeleNav GPS).
(Applications) ➔
(
2. If prompted, read the GPS Settings notification, tap GPS
Settings button and follow the on-screen prompts to
enable the necessary GPS location feature.
3. Read the agreement and tap Accept to accept the terms, or
tap Exit to close the window. Wait for the application to
load required first-time use files.
4. Select to either Upgrade to Premium the application or use
the Use Basic Navigation
.
5. Use the available on-screen functions.
Applications and Development
176
• Location allows you to select the level of location accuracy that is
embedded into your Qik videos. When posting or sharing Qik video
information with others, you can decide how accurate the related
Video Chat
This is a mobile video sharing and 2-way video calling service.
This application also lets you record and share experiences with
your friends, family, and your favorite social networks.
location information can be. Choose from: Off
,
City level, Street
level, or Track live
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Video Chat) ➔ Sign up
(Applications) ➔
• Video encoding quality allows you to assign a video quality to the
outbound video. Choose from: Low Normal, or High
,
.
(
.
• About displays the version information for the Qik Video Chat
application.
2. Fill in the Email address, Username, and Password, then
tap Sign up to create your new account.
Recording a Video Chat
3. Follow the on-screen instructions. For more information,
1. From the Home screen, tap
Video Chat).
2. Tap Record & Share
3. Read the one-time disclaimer describing the public nature
of your videos and tap OK
(Applications) ➔
visit: http://qik.com/
To adjust application settings:
1. Press and then tap Settings
.
(
.
.
2. Choose from any of the following options:
.
• Sharing allows you to setup sharing preferences.
4. Tap Record to start recording.
– or –
–
–
–
–
Facebook: set up your Qik credentials for Facebook posting of videos.
Twitter: set up your Twitter account sharing preferences.
YouTube: set up your Qik credentials for YouTube posting of videos.
People: set up your contact sharing parameters.
Tap Stop to end the recording process.
5. Enter a title for your video segment and select those
• Privacy allows you to select who can find you and see your videos.
services you wish to use to distribute your video.
• M2M Settings allows you to configure the Mobile to Mobile video
chat settings.
•
Services such as Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, SMS, and E-mail ask
that you select a recipient for your video segment.
177
Videos
Voice Command
The Video Player application plays video files stored on your
microSD card.
This application can use your voice to perform operations that
you would normally have to do by hand such as dialing a phone
number, texting a message, playing music, etc.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Videos).
(Applications) ➔
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Voice command).
(Applications) ➔
(
(
(
(
Visual Voicemail
Visual Voicemail enables users to view a list of people who left a
voicemail message, and listen to the any message they want
without being limited to chronological order.
Voice Recorder
The Voice Recorder allows you to record an audio file up to one
minute long and then immediately send it as a message.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Visual Voicemail).
(
Applications) ➔
1. From the Home screen, tap
Utility) ➔ Voice Recorder).
(Applications) ➔
(
(
(
2. Tap Record icon to record an audio file.
3. Tap Stop to stop recording. The file automatically saves to
the Voice list.
4. From the Recorded files page, press
and then tap
Share and select a method in which to share this audio file.
Selections are: Messaging, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Gmail, or
Email. Refer to each specific section, depending on the
method you selected to send this voice recording.
Applications and Development
178
Voice Search
Web
The Voice Search feature is a voice-activated application that
allows you to tell the phone what to search for and then the
phone activates a Google search based on what you said.
Open the browser to start surfing the web. The browser is fully
optimized and comes with advanced functionality to enhance the
Internet browsing feature on your phone.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Web).
(Applications) ➔
(
1. From the Home screen, tap
Voice Search).
(Applications) ➔
(
YouTube
2. Tap Speak now and then speak your search command
slowly and clearly.
YouTube is a video sharing website on which users can upload
and share videos, and view them in MPEG-4 format.
Google searches for the information and displays related
information in the browser.
1. From the Home screen, tap
YouTube).
(Applications) ➔
(
Voice Talk
2. When the screen loads you can begin searching and
Launches your phone’s built-in voice recognition system that
allows you to initiate several common tasks without having to
touch the phone. Features include: Call, Text, Navigate, Play
music, Memo, and Driving mode.
viewing posted videos.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Voice Talk).
(Applications) ➔
(
179
To configure YouTube Settings:
Press and then tap Settings and configure the
To watch a high quality video:
Press and then tap Settings
Zinio Reader
ᮣ
ᮣ
➔
High quality on mobile.
following parameters:
• High quality on mobile, when enabled, allows you to start all
videos in high quality mode while you are connected to a mobile
network.
Launches a digital magazine reader. Zinio has transformed your
favorite print magazines into digital format.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Zinio Reader).
(Applications) ➔
• Caption font size allows you to set the font size used by on-screen
captions. Choose from: Small, Medium, Large, or Extra Large.
(
• Clear search history allows you to clear any previous YouTube
2. Tap sign in if you already have an account or tap create an
searches from appearing within the search box.
account to continue.
• SafeSearch filtering allows you to configure block settings for
videos containing restricted content. This option blocks these
videos from appearing within your search results. Choose from:
Don’t filter, Moderate, or Strict blocking.
3. Follow the on-screen prompts.
• Help provides answers to most YouTube questions.
• Feedback allows you to provide user feedback to YouTube.
• Google Mobile Terms of Service
• YouTube Terms of Service
• Google Mobile Privacy Policy
• YouTube Privacy Policy
• Application version displays the software version for the current
YouTube application.
Applications and Development
180
Section 10: Connections
Your phone is equipped with features that allow you to quickly
connect to the web.
•
•
Hot Trends: provides an on-screen list of today’s hot trends on movies,
music, etc..
Quick Links: provides an on-screen list of Web sites and services.
Web
• Beat the Traffic: allows you to view local traffic conditions, Maps,
Routes, and Incidents.
Your phone is equipped with a Google browser to navigate the
mobile web. This section explains how to navigate the browser
and use the basic features.
• Cheap Gas: provides an on-screen listing of the nearest gas
stations and their current gas prices.
Accessing the Internet
• T-Mobile Mall: allows you to download the T-Mobile Mall website.
To access the Browser:
• Yahoo Mail: displays the Sign in for Yahoo Mail. Register by
sending a text message with the word START to 92500 if you are
not already registered.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Web).
(Applications) ➔
(
• Facebook: displays the Facebook Log in. Sign up from this page if
you are not already registered.
Note: You must disable your Wi-Fi connection if you wish to view the web2go
• ESPN: displays current sports news headlines and more.
• E! Online: displays current entertainment news headlines and
more.
Homepage
• Mapquest: provides access to the online mapquest site.
When you access the Browser, the web2go home page displays
the following topics:
• Yelp: provides access to Yelp which is an online urban city guide
that helps people find cool places to eat, shop, drink, relax and play.
Its the fun and easy way to find, review and talk about what's great
in your world.
•
Google Search: allows you to quickly search for online topics using
the Google search engine.
•
Yahoo Top news stories: provides an on-screen display of today’s top
news and entertainment stories.
181
• What’s Now: provides quick access to a variety of different
entertainment and shopping websites.
Note: If the Automatic brightness feature is enabled (Settings
➔
Display
➔
Brightness), you can not modify the browser’s brightness setting.
• More Sites: provides access to additional Web sites.
• Refresh: reloads the current page.
•
•
Feeds: provides an on-screen list of weather feeds for selected cities.
Directory: provides access to additional directory service from: What’s
New, Email/IM, Facebook Social/Chat, Cnn News, Weather, and
Entertainment.
• Forward: forwards the browser to another web page.
• More: displays the following additional options:
–
–
Add bookmark: allows you to add a URL to your bookmark list.
Navigating with the Browser
Add shortcut to Home: adds a shortcut to your web2go homepage on
your phone’s Home screen.
1. To select an item, tap an entry.
–
–
–
Find on page: allows you to search in the current page.
2. To scroll through a website, sweep the screen with your
Page info: displays information about the selected page.
finger in an up or down motion.
Share page: allows you to share the page using Gmail or as a
message.
3. To return to the previous page, press
.
–
–
Downloads: displays the download history.
Browser Options
Settings: allows you to change the way you view your web pages by
changing these options. See “Browser Settings” on page 185.
1. From the home page, press
to access the following
–
Print: provides print access on compatible Samsung printers.
options:
Entering a URL
• New window: displays a new window so you can browse multiple
URLs. For more information, refer to “Adding and Deleting
Windows” on page 183.
You can access a website quickly by entering the URL. Websites
are optimized for viewing on your phone.
• Windows: displays a list of the windows you have open.
To enter a URL and go to a particular website:
• Browser brightness: allows you to manually adjust the screen
brightness.
ᮣ
From the homepage tap the URL field at the top of the
screen, enter the URL and tap
.
Connections
182
Note: This is not the same application as the Google Search Widget. The
Note: This icon will display a number that corresponds to the current number
web2go screen can not be accessed via a Wi-Fi connection.
of active browser windows,
Search the Internet
4. Scroll across the screen to view the currently active
windows and tap an entry to launch the selected Internet
window.
To perform an internet search using keywords:
1. From within the Google search application, tap the Google
search field, enter the keyword(s) to search using the on-
screen keypad.
5. Tap
next to the listing to delete the window.
Using Bookmarks
2. Tap
. A list of search results displays.
While navigating a website, you can bookmark a site to quickly
and easily access it at a future time. The URLs (website
addresses) of the bookmarked sites display in the Bookmarks
page. From the Bookmarks page you can also view your Most
visited websites and view your History.
3. Tap a link to view the website.
Adding and Deleting Windows
You can have up to eight Internet windows open at one time. To
add a new window, follow these steps:
1. From the webpage, tap
displays. Additional pages include Most visited and History
2. Press to display the following options:
. The Bookmarks page
1. From your browser, press
and then tap New window.
.
– or –
Press
and then tap Windows
➔
New window.
• Bookmark last-viewed page: Creates a new bookmark for the
last webpage that you viewed.
2. A new browser window displays.
• List/Thumbnail view: Select Thumbnail view (default) to view a
thumbnail of the webpage with the name listed, or select List view
to view a list of the bookmarks with Name and URL listed.
3. Press
windows.
and then tap Windows to see a list of all open
• Create folder: Creates a new folder in which to store new
bookmarks.
183
• Change order: Rearranges the current bookmarks.
Adding Bookmarks
• Move to folder: Selected bookmarks are moved to a selected
1. From the Home webpage, tap
➔
Add.
folder.
2. Use the on-screen keypad to enter the name of the
• Delete: Erases selected bookmarks.
bookmark and the URL.
3. Tap a bookmark to view the webpage, or touch and hold a
bookmark for the following options:
3. Assign a folder location. Home is the default.
4. Tap OK. The new save page now appears on the
• Open: Opens the webpage of the selected bookmark.
Bookmarks page.
• Open in new window: Opens the webpage in a new window.
• Edit bookmark: Allows you to edit the name or URL of the
bookmark. For more information, refer to “Editing Bookmarks”
on page 184.
Editing Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark
you want to edit.
• Add shortcut to Home: Adds a shortcut to the bookmarked
webpage to your phone’s Home screen.
2. Tap Edit bookmark
.
• Share link: Allows you to share a URL address via Bluetooth, Email,
Gmail, Messaging, My tag, or Wi-Fi.
3. Use the on-screen keypad to edit the name of the
bookmark or the URL.
• Copy link URL: Allows you to copy the URL address to use in a
message.
4. Tap OK
.
• Delete bookmark: Allows you to delete a bookmark. For more
information, refer to “Deleting Bookmarks” on page 184.
Deleting Bookmarks
1. From the Bookmarks page, touch and hold the bookmark
you want to delete.
• Set as homepage: Sets the bookmark to your new homepage.
2. Tap Delete bookmark
.
3. At the confirmation window, tap OK
.
Connections
184
Emptying the Cookies
Using Most Visited
A cookie is a small file placed on your phone by a website during
navigation. In addition to containing some site-specific
information, a cookie can also contain some personal information
(such as a username and password) which might pose a security
risk if not properly managed. You can clear these cookies from
your phone at any time.
The Most visited list provides you with a list of the most visited
and bookmarked websites. These entries are used to return to
previously unmarked web pages.
1. From the Home webpage, tap
➔
Most visited tab.
A list of your most frequently visited webpages displays.
The most frequently visited web pages display at the top of
the list.
1. From the Home webpage, press
and then tap
More Settings Clear all cookie data.
➔
➔
2. Tap any entry to display the selected webpage.
2. Tap OK to delete the cookies or tap Cancel to exit.
Browser Settings
Using Web History
To configure browser settings:
The History list displays a list of the most recently viewed
websites. These entries can be used to return to previously
unmarked web pages.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Web).
and then tap More
(Applications) ➔
(
1. From the Home webpage, tap
➔
History tab.
2. Press
➔
Settings.
A list of the most recently viewed websites displays.
3. Choose from the following on-screen options:
2. Tap an entry to display the webpage.
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium, or
Close.
– or –
• Open pages in overview: Displays an overview of recently viewed
Press
and then tap Clear history to delete the current
web pages.
History list.
• Text encoding: Adjusts the current text encoding.
185
• Block pop-up windows: Prevents popup advertisement or
windows from appearing on-screen. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
• Clear all cookie data: Deletes all current browser cookie files.
• Remember form data: Allows the device to store data from any
previously filled out forms. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function.
• Loadimages: Allows web page images to load along with the other
text components of a loaded website.
• Clear form data: Deletes any stored data from previously filled out
forms. Tap OK to complete the process.
• Auto-fit pages: Allows web pages to be resized to fit as much of
the screen as possible.
• Enable location: Allows websites to request access to your
location.
• Landscape view only: Displays the browser in only the horizontal
position.
• Clear location access: Clears location access for all websites. Tap
OK to complete the process.
• Enable JavaScript: Enables javascript for the current Web page.
Without this feature, some pages may not display properly. Remove
the checkmark to disable this function.
• Remember passwords: Stores usernames and passwords for
visited sites. Remove the checkmark to disable this function.
• Enable plug-ins: Allows the download of plug-ins such as Adobe
Flash.
• Clear passwords: Deletes any previously stored usernames or
passwords. Tap OK to complete the process.
• Open in background: New pages are launched in a separate page
and displayed behind the current one. Remove the checkmark to
disable this function.
• Show security warnings: Notifies you if there is a security issue
with the current website. Remove the checkmark to disable this
function.
• Set home page: Sets the current home page for the Web browser.
• Select search engine: Allows you to choose a default search
engine for your phone. Choose from: Google, Yahoo!, or Bing.
• Default storage: Sets the default storage to Memory card.
• Clear cache: Deletes all currently cached data. Tap OK to complete
• Website settings: View advanced settings for individual websites.
the process.
• Reset to default: Clears all browser data and resets all settings to
default.
• Clear history: Clears the browser navigation history. Tap OK to
complete the process.
• Accept cookies: Allows sites, that require cookies, to save and
read cookies from your device.
Connections
186
Bluetooth Status Indicators
Bluetooth
About Bluetooth
The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status
at a glance:
Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that
allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth
devices, such as headsets and hands-free car kits, and
Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless
devices. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to
approximately 30 feet.
Displays when Bluetooth is active.
Displays when Bluetooth is connected (paired) and
communicating.
Bluetooth Settings
Turning Bluetooth On and Off
The Bluetooth settings menu allows you to set up many of the
characteristics of your device’s Bluetooth service, including:
To turn Bluetooth on:
1. Press
Wireless and network
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to activate the feature (checkmark
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
•
•
•
Entering or changing the name your device uses for Bluetooth
communication and description
➔
Bluetooth settings
.
Setting your device’s visibility (or “discoverability”) for other Bluetooth
devices
indicates active). When active,
Status area.
displays in the
Displaying your device’s Bluetooth address
To access the Bluetooth Settings menu:
1. Press and then tap
Wireless and network Bluetooth settings
To turn Bluetooth off:
1. Press
Wireless and network
2. Tap the Bluetooth field to deactivate the feature.
➔
(Settings) ➔
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
.
➔
Bluetooth settings
.
2. Verify Bluetooth is active. Indicated by a green check mark
in the Bluetooth field.
187
3. Tap the Device name
,
Visible
,
Visible time-out, and Search
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Scan for devices to
search for visible external Bluetooth-compatible devices
such as headsets, devices, printers, and computers.
for devices fields to set the options.
To change your Bluetooth name:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted
connections between your device and another Bluetooth device.
When you pair devices, they share a passkey, allowing for fast,
secure connections while bypassing the discovery and
authentication process.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Device name
.
3. Enter a new name.
4. Tap OK to complete the rename process.
To set visibility:
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
Note: Pairing between two Bluetooth devices is a one-time process. Once
pairing is established the devices continue to recognize their
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible
.
partnership and exchange information without entering a passcode.
Making your device visible allows other devices to pair and
communicate.
To pair your device with another Bluetooth device:
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap Visible
.
Note: Your device visibility is based on the time set within the Visible time-
out field (2 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 1 Hour, or Never). This value appears
as a countdown within this Visible time-out field.
Your device must be visible to successfully pair with an
external device.
To scan for Bluetooth devices:
3. Tap Scan for devices. Your device displays a list of
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
discovered in-range Bluetooth devices.
4. Tap a device from the list to initiate pairing.
Connections
188
5. Enter the passkey or PIN code, if needed, and tap OK
.
From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device, and select
6. The external device must accept the connection and enter
Disconnect
.
your device’s PIN code.
Once successfully paired to an external device,
displays in the Status area.
Note: Disconnections are manually done but often occur automatically if the
paired device goes out of range of your phone or it is powered off.
Deleting a Paired Bluetooth Device
Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-
compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and
functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all
Bluetooth-compatible devices.
Deleting a device from your list removes its “connection record”
and upon reconnection would require that you re-enter all the
previous pairing information.
Disconnecting a Paired Bluetooth Device
1. Verify Bluetooth is active.
Disconnecting a paired device breaks the connection between
the device and your phone, but retains the knowledge of the
pairing. At a later point when you wish to reconnect the device,
there is no need to setup the connection information again.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, touch and hold the
name of the previously paired device (from the bottom of
the page). This opens the connected device’s menu
options.
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active.
3. Tap Unpair to delete the paired device.
2. From the Bluetooth settings page, tap the previously paired
device (from the bottom of the page).
Sending Contacts via Bluetooth
3. Tap OK to confirm disconnection.
Depending on your paired devices’ settings and capabilities, you
may be able to send pictures, Contact information, or other items
using a Bluetooth connection.
– or –
189
Enable Downloading for Web Applications
Note: Prior to using this feature, Bluetooth must first be enabled on both your
phone and the external device, and the recipient’s device must be
visible.
Important!: Before you can download a web application you must insert an
SD into the phone and enable the Unknown sources feature
1. Verify your Bluetooth is active and your phone is visible.
2. From the Home screen, tap
(Contacts).
1. Press
Applications
2. Tap the Unknown sources check box.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
3. Touch and hold the entry from the list to display the on-
.
screen context menu.
4. Tap Send namecard via
➔
Bluetooth and select a paired
external Bluetooth device.
3. Tap OK to allow install of non-Market applications.
Tap again to remove the checkmark and disable the
installation of non-market applications.
Note: The external Bluetooth device must be visible and communicating for
the pairing to be successful.
5. A Bluetooth share notification displays in your notifications
Warning!: Not all web applications are safe to download. In order to protect
your phone and data, use Android Market to install web
list.
Connections
190
PC Connections
You can connect your device to a PC using an optional PC data
cable using various USB connection modes. Mass storage is the
default connection method.
Note: To use any downloaded market application that requires a USB
connection between your phone and your PC, you should first set the
USB setting to Mass storage
.
2. Connect the USB cable to the phone and connect the cable
Mass storage: allows you to use the onboard storage capacity of the
phone to store and upload files. This option allows your computer to
detect the phone as a removable storage drive.
to the computer.
3. Tap Connect USB storage. Both the phone and computer
display icons to show that the device is mounted. As soon
as the connection is established a drive letter is assigned
to the phone’s storage device.
Kies air: allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your
phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network.
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device
A pop-up window displays on the PC when connected.
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the
device, you can also access the files directory from the memory
card by using the device as a memory card reader.
4. Open the folder to view files.
5. Copy files from the PC to the memory card.
Prior to using Kies air for Phone Update
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as a removable disk,
Before using Kies air to upgrade your device, it is recommended
that you backup your personal data prior to use.
separate from the internal memory.
1. Press
Wireless and network
PC
➔
and then tap
USB utilities
(
Settings) ➔
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:
➔
➔
Connect storage to
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap Import/Export
3. Tap Export to SD card
(Contacts).
.
.
➔
191
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap Applications) ➔
Gallery).
Kies Air
(
Kies Air allows you to sync your Windows PC wirelessly with your
phone provided they are both on the same Wi-Fi network. You
can view and share call logs, videos, photos, music, bookmarks,
ringtones, and even send SMS messages from your PC.
(
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.
3. Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD
Tip: Before beginning, it is recommended that you update the Java
card prior to initiating a Kies air update.
application running on your machine.
Enabling USB Debugging
1. Sign onto the same Wi-Fi network from your phone and
USB debugging must be enabled before being able to use the
Development feature.
from your PC.
2. From the Home screen, tap
Kies air).
3. From the Kies air homescreen, tap Start
4. If prompted, select a network. Choose from either Wi-Fi or
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot
(Applications) ➔
1. Press
Applications
➔
and then tap
Development.
(Settings) ➔
(
➔
.
2. Tap the USB debugging field to verify the feature is active
before connecting your USB cable.
.
3. Using an optional PC data cable, connect the multifunction
jack on your device to a PC.
5. Write down the on-screen URL address.
Important!: Both your phone and your computer must be connected to the
same Wireless Access Point (WAP).
6. From your computer, enter the URL in your Web browser.
Connections
192
7. If prompted, an Access Request prompt is displayed on
your device. Tap Allow to permit connection between the
computer and device.
•
•
File Explorer
Language settings
14. To exit the Kies air application, tap Stop on your device,
then close out the Web browser on your computer.
8. On your computer, you may be prompted to run a Java
Wi-Fi
plugin for a TransferManagerApplet. Click Run
.
About Wi-Fi
9. Tap the Remember for today checkbox if you will be using
Kies air with the same PC later.
Wi-Fi (short for "wireless fidelity") is a term used for certain
types of Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN). Wi-Fi
communication requires access to an existing and accessible
Wireless Access Point (WAP). These WAPs can either be Open
(unsecured) as within most Hot Spots, or Secured (requiring
knowledge of the Router name and password).
10. From your PC, a security warning may be displayed asking
if you want to run this application. Click Run to continue.
11. On your PC, the Kies air screen is displayed. On your
phone, the
icon appears at the top of your screen.
12. Follow the on-screen instructions to view and share
Note: After you complete a connection to an active Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi
Calling feature will automatically be enabled.
information between your phone and PC.
13. Click a link from the left navigation pane to access one of
Activating Wi-Fi
several device file categories such as:
By default, your device’s Wi-Fi feature is turned off (deactivated).
Activating Wi-Fi allows your device to discover and connect to
compatible in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).
•
•
•
•
•
[Device Name] - provides an overview of all the main categories.
Photos/Videos/Music
Ringtones
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi settings
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
.
Bookmarks
Messages/Call Log/Contacts
193
2. Tap Wi-Fi to activate the feature. A checkmark indicates
that Wi-Fi is active. The device scans for available in-range
wireless networks and displays them under Wi-Fi networks
on the same screen.
Manually Add a New Network Connection
1. Tap Add Wi-Fi network
.
2. Enter the Network SSID (the name of your Wireless Access
Point).
Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
3. Tap the Security field and select a security option. This
must match the current security setting on your target
WAP.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi settings
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
.
The network names and security settings (Open network or
Secured with WEP) of detected Wi-Fi networks display in
the Wi-Fi networks section.
4. Enter your WAP’s password if the WAP is secure.
5. Tap Save to store the new information and connect to the
target WAP.
2. Tap the network you wish to connect to.
Note: No prompt to enter the WAP key displays if this is the second time to
connect to a previously accessed or secured wireless network. The
WAP key is required when the device is reset using factory default
settings.
Note: When you select an open network you are automatically connected.
3. Enter a wireless password (if necessary).
4. Tap Connect
.
Connections
194
Deactivating Wi-Fi
Displays when Wi-Fi is configured for a direct
connection to another compatible device in the same
direct communication mode.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi settings
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
.
Wi-Fi Advanced Settings
2. Tap the Wi-Fi field to deactivate the feature. The
The Wi-Fi settings - Advanced menu allows you to set up many of
the device’s Wi-Fi services, including:
checkmark grays.
– or –
•
•
•
Setting the Wi-Fi sleep policy
Activate and Deactiavte Wi-Fi from the Notification bar.
Viewing the device’s MAC Address
Configuring use of either a DHCP or Static IP
Note: Use of wireless data connections such as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth can
To access the Wi-Fi Advanced Settings menu:
1. Press and then tap
Wireless and network Wi-Fi settings
and then tap Advanced
reduce battery life and use times.
➔
(Settings) ➔
Manually Scan for a Wi-Fi Network
➔
.
1. Press
Wireless and networks
2. Press and then tap Scan
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
2. Press
.
➔
Wi-Fi settings
.
Tethering
.
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be
the Mobile AP feature.
Wi-Fi Status Indicators
The following icons indicate the Wi-Fi connection status:
Displays when Wi-Fi is connected, active, and
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).
Displays when Wi-Fi is active and there is an available
open wireless network.
195
2. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu to remove the
Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while
using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers
are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/
check mark and deactivate the feature.
3. Remove the USB cable from the phone.
Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi-Fi hotspot.
The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+
(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).
Wireless and network
➔
Tethering and portable hotspot
.
2. Plug in the USB cable between your computer and your
phone.
Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as
Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the
Mobile AP service.
3. When prompted for a USB mode, press
to exit the
menu.
4. Tap USB tethering from the Tethering menu. This places a
green check mark next to the entry and activates the
feature. A Tethering or Hotspot active notification briefly
appears on the screen.
Note: You must have a tethering plan on your account to use the Wi-Fi
hotspot. You can not use data on the device while it is being used as a
hotspot.
To activate the Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot service:
Look for the Tethering active icon
area of the screen.
in the Status bar
1. Press
Wireless and network
2. Tap Portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings
➔
and then tap
Tethering and portable hotspot
OK
(Settings) ➔
➔
.
To disconnect tethering:
1. Press
Wireless and network
➔
.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
3. Tap Portable Wi-Fi hotspot. This places a checkmark in the
➔
Tethering and portable hotspot
.
adjacent field to activate the service.
4. Tap Yes to continue with the activation.
Connections
196
5. Tap Configure portable Wi-Fi hotspot
.
3. Select this Hotspot and follow your on-screen instructions
to complete the connection.
6. Create a new Network SSID name and then write it down.
4. Launch your Web browser to confirm you have an Internet
7. Confirm the Mobile AP service icon
appears at the
connection.
top of the screen.
To secure the Portable Hotspot service:
Note: By default, the connection is open and not secured. It is recommended
that you access the Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot settings and create a
secure connection by using a password for communication.
The two most common methods for securing your connection to
the Hotspot are to a security method (WPA2 PSK) and to Hide
your phone’s SSID name.
1. Press
Wireless and network
Portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings
hotspot
2. Tap the Security field and select WPA2 PSK
➔
and then tap
Tethering and portable hotspot
Configure portable Wi-Fi
(Settings) ➔
Note: Using your 4G service and Portable Wi-Fi Hotspot drains your phone’s
battery at a much faster rate than when using any other feature
combination.
➔
➔
The best way to keep using the phone as a hotspot is to have it
connected to a power supply.
➔
.
To connect to the Hotspot:
.
1. Enable Wi-Fi (wireless) functionality on your target device
(laptop, media device, etc.).
3. With security enabled, enter a new password into the
Password field.
2. Scan for Wi-Fi networks from the device and select your
phone hotspot from the network list.
Important!: The more complex the password, the harder it will be for
intruders to break your security. It is recommended that you not
use names, birthdays, or other personal information.
•
The SSID name for your phone’s hotspot is determined by what you
entered into the Network SSID field.
4. Tap Save to store the new settings.
•
You can change the name by tapping Configure portable Wi-Fi
hotspot
➔
Network SSID and changing the entry.
197
Section 11: Time Management
This section describes how you can manage time using time-
related applications such as the Calendar, Alarm Clock, Analog or
Digital clock, and the World clock.
• Delete: allows you to delete All events, All events before today, or
an individual event.
• Settings: displays a list of configurable settings.
Creating a Calendar Event
Calendar
1. From the Home screen, tap
Calendar).
(Applications) ➔
With the Calendar feature, you can consult the calendar by day,
week, or month, create events, and set an alarm to act as a
reminder.
(
2. From the Month tab, press
➔
Create.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications) ➔
Calendar Settings
(
Calendar). The Calendar displays four tabs:
Using the Calendar settings you can select the day with which
you want the calendar to begin. You also select how you want to
view the calendar, by Month, Week, or Day or determine how to
manage events, notifications, sounds, and defaults reminders.
• Month: displays the Month view.
• Week: displays the Week view.
• Day: displays the Day view.
• List: allows you to search for events for the selected Month, Week,
or Day, or you can look for events for a future date.
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press Settings
(
Applications) ➔
.
➔
.
2. Press
and select one of the following options:
3. Tap Calendars and select the calendar categories you want
to display or tap All calendar. A check mark indicates
selection.
• Create: creates a new Event.
• Go to: displays a specific date.
• Today: displays the date highlighted with a Blue box highlighting
the date.
4. Tap Default view and select a view: Month
,
Week, Day, or
• Search: allows you to search within your current events.
List.
Time Management
198
5. Tap Day views and select a type: Time grid, or Event list
.
Clock
This feature allows you to create an alarm to ring at a specified
time, track time in other parts of the world, use a stopwatch, or
set a timer.
6. Tap First day of week and select either Sunday or Monday
.
7. Tap Hide declined events to activate this option. A check
mark indicates selection.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Clock).
(
Applications) ➔
8. Tap Hide contacts’ anniversaries to activate this option. A
(
check mark indicates selection.
Setting an Alarm
1. From the Home screen, tap
9. Tap Lock time zone (to lock event time based on your
current user-selected time zone). Select a time zone from
within the Select time zone field.
(
Applications) ➔
(Clock).
2. Tap
(
Create alarm).
10. Tap Set alerts & notifications to adjust the event notification
3. Use the plus or minus symbols to enter the hour, and
minutes, then tap AM or PM (toggles depending on which
was last selected).
method. Choose from: Alert
Off
11. Tap Vibration to activate this notification option. Selections
are: Always Only in Silent mode, or Never
,
Status bar notification, and
.
4. Tap the Alarm repeat field and touch the number of times
,
.
you want this alarm to repeat. Selections are: One-time
12. Tap Select ringtone to assign a ringtone to a calendar event
event Daily, Every weekday(Mon-Fri), or Weekly. If you
,
notification.
selected Weekly, a button row displays. Tap each day of
the week in which you want this alarm to repeat, then tap
13. Tap Calendar sync and select the type of general
synchronization settings you want. A check mark indicates
selection.
Save
.
199
5. Tap the Alarm type field and select one of the following:
Melody Vibration Vibration and melody, or Briefing
Tap the field to assign a duration time (3 min, 5 min, 10
min, 15 min, or 30 min) and nature tone (Morning, Breeze,
Mist, Forest, Light, or Rain).
,
,
.
6. Slide the slider bar left or right in the Alarm volume field to
decrease or increase the alarm volume. A sample of the
volume level plays.
• Smart alarm Duration category describes the length of time the
alarm will remain silent between alarm notifications (snooze time).
• Smart alarm Tone category provides one of several nature sounds
that are used as the alarm tone.
7. Tap the Alarm tone field and select one of the following:
Sounds, or Go to My files. Locate a sound to use as an
alarm ringtone then tap OK to activate the ringtone.
10. Tap the Name field and enter a name for this Alarm.
11. Tap Save to store the new alarm event.
Turning Off an Alarm
8. Tap the radio button to activate a tone for the Snooze. Tap
the field to assign a duration time (3 min, 5 min, 10 min,
15 min, or 30 min) and snooze repetition (1 time, 2 times,
3 times, 5 times, and 10 times).
ᮣ
To stop an alarm when it sounds, touch and slide
the right.
to
Setting the Snooze Feature
• Duration indicates the length of time the alarm will remain silent
between alarm notifications (snooze time).
ᮣ
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds,
touch and slide
to the left. Snooze must first be set
• Snooze repeat indicates the numbers of snooze sessions that are
assigned to this alarm. How many times will the snooze silence the
alarm.
in the alarm settings.
9. Tap the radio button to activate Smart alarm which slowly
increases screen brightness and the volume of nature
tones to simulate dawn breaking.
Time Management
200
4. Tap Stop to stop the counter.
World Clock
This feature allows you to find out what time it is another part of
world.
5. Tap Restart to restart the lap counter. You can have
multiple lap times.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Clock).
2. Tap the World clock tab.
3. Tap Add city) then scroll and select the desired city,
or tap in the search field to locate a city.
To assign DST settings:
1. Locate a desired city from the World Clock list.
2. Touch and hold a city and select DST settings
(Applications) ➔
6. Tap Reset to reset the counter.
(
Setting a Timer
1. From the Home screen, tap
Clock) ➔ Timer tab.
2. Tap the hr min, or sec field and use the on-screen keypad
(Applications) ➔
(
(
,
to enter the hour, minute, or seconds. The timer plays an
alarm at the end of the countdown.
.
3. Tap Start to start the timer.
3. Select a DST setting (Automatic, Off, 1 hour or 2 hours).
4. Tap Stop to stop the timer or Reset to reset the timer and
start over.
Stopwatch
This feature allows you to capture elapsed time while letting the
stopwatch keep running.
5. Tap Restart to resume the timer counter.
Configuring a Desk Clock
This feature lets you activate an on-screen clock that can be
viewed when the device is docked.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Clock) ➔ Stopwatch tab.
(Applications) ➔
(
2. Tap Start to start the stopwatch counter.
ᮣ
From the Home screen, tap
Clock) ➔ Desk clock tab.
(Applications) ➔
3. Tap Lap to begin the lap time counter.
(
201
Section 12: Changing Your Settings
This section explains the sound and phone settings for your
device.Itincludessuchsettingsas:display,security,memory,and
any extra settings associated with your phone.
Activating Wi-Fi
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi settings.
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
Wireless and Networks
Using Flight mode
2. Tap Wi-Fi. A check mark displayed indicates Wi-Fi is
active.
Flight mode allows you to use many of your phone’s features,
such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are in an airplane
or in any other area where making or receiving calls or data is
prohibited.
Wi-Fi settings
Once set up for Wi-Fi connectivity, your phone automatically uses
Wi-Fi, when available, for all your mobile phone services.
1. Press
Wireless and network
2. Configure the settings as desired.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Important!: When your phone is in Flight mode, it cannot send or receive any
➔
Wi-Fi settings
.
calls or access online information or applications.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
.
(Settings) ➔
The available connection types displayed with a security type
displayed next to them.
Wireless and network
2. Tap Flight mode. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Flight mode is active.
Changing Your Settings
202
Network Notification
WPS allows you to push buttons instead of entering a network
name and wireless security PIN.
By default, when Wi-Fi is on, you receive notifications in the
Status bar anytime your phone detects an available Wi-Fi
network. You can deactivate this feature if you do not want to
receive notifications.
1. Press
Wireless and network
2. Tap WPS button connection
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
Wi-Fi settings
.
.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi settings
(Settings) ➔
3. Press the WPS button on your Wi-Fi access point within 2
Wireless and network
➔
.
minutes.
2. Tap Network notification. A check mark displayed next to
Manually Adding a Wi-Fi Network
the feature indicates Network notification is active.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi settings
(Settings) ➔
3. Tap Network notification again to remove the check mark
Wireless and network
➔
.
and deactivate this feature.
2. Tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.
WPS Button Connection
3. Tap Add Wi-Fi network
.
The WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) button is a standard for easy
and secure wireless network set up and connections. To use
WPS, the connecting device must support WPS and be
compatible with Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) security. WPS can
automatically set up a random network name and WPA wireless
security for wireless Wi-Fi phones, routers, access points,
computers, adapters, and other electronic devices.
4. Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier) and Security settings
then tap Save
.
Note: An SSID is a unique key which identifies a wireless LAN. Its purpose is
to stop other wireless equipment from accessing your LAN — whether
accidentally or intentionally. To communicate, wireless devices must
be configured with the same SSID.
203
Wi-Fi Direct Settings
5. When prompted to complete the connection, tap OK. The
status field now reads “Connected” and your connected
device is listed within the Wi-Fi Direct devices listing.
You can configure your device to connect directly with other Wi-Fi
capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data between
devices. These devices must be enabled for
Wi-Fi direct communication. This connection is direct and not via
a hotspot or WAP.
Wi-Fi Calling
You can configure your device to make and receive calls over an
active Wi-Fi connection. Wi-Fi Calling is an excellent solution for
coverage issues in and around the home or wherever cellular
coverage is limited. Minutes used while connected to the Wi-Fi
network count against available rate plan minutes. For more
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi network
connection.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
Wi-Fi Direct settings
.
1. Ensure that the Wi-Fi connected icon displays on the
2. Tap Wi-Fi Direct. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicating it is enabled. Your phone will begin to
search for other devices enabled with Wi-Fi direct
connections.
status bar.
2. Press
➔
and then tap
Wi-Fi Calling.
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
Wi-Fi Calling Settings
3. After scan, tap a device name to begin the connection
process to another Wi-Fi Direct compatible device.
Important!: A new ISIM card must be installed within the device prior to using
this feature. Wi-Fi must first be active and communicating prior
to launching Wi-Fi Calling.
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service active and
running before it can be detected by your device.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
Wi-Fi Calling Settings
.
4. Tap Connect. The direct connection is then established.
Changing Your Settings
204
2. Tap Connection Preferences and select a preference for use
Activating the Device Name
of the Wi-Fi Calling feature:
1. Press
Wireless and network
The assigned device name displays.
2. Press to erase the current device name and enter a
new name for this device using the keyboard.
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
➔
Bluetooth settings
➔
Device name.
• Wi-Fi Preferred: Wi-Fi network is preferred over cellular network
when making calls. Calling requires you to stay in the Wi-Fi range.
• Wi-Fi Only: Wi-Fi network is required for making calls. Calling
requires you to stay in the Wi-Fi range.
• Cellular Preferred: The cellular network is preferred over a Wi-Fi
network when making calls.
3. Tap OK to confirm your setting.
3. Tap OK to save the setting.
Activating Visibility
Bluetooth settings
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Visible.
In this menu you can activate Bluetooth, view or assign a device
name, activate your phone so other Bluetooth devices can
discover it, or scan for other, available Bluetooth devices with
which to pair.
Wireless and network
➔
Bluetooth settings
➔
The phone is now activated for discovery other devices for
a period of time determined by the value set within the
Visible time-out menu.
Activating Bluetooth
Scanning for Devices
ᮣ
Press
Wireless and network
Bluetooth to turn it on.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
This option allows you to scan for active Bluetooth devices so you
can pair with them.
➔
Bluetooth settings and tap
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Note: Bluetooth must be enabled prior to use.
Wireless and network
➔
Bluetooth settings
➔
Scan for devices. Your phone begins scanning and lists any
discovered devices in the Bluetooth devices section.
205
2. Tap a device name to pair with the device.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
Tethering and portable hotspot
.
Important!: Some Bluetooth devices are secured and require a PIN number to
confirm and pair with them.
Mobile AP
3. Enter a PIN to pair with the device, if one is required, and
This feature allows you to turn your phone into a Wi-Fi hotspot.
The feature works best when used in conjunction with HSPA+
(4G) data services (although 3G service can also be used).
tap OK
.
USB Utilities
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ USB
Important!: The Mobile AP service can not be active at the same time as
Wi-Fi. Please close your Wi-Fi connection prior to launching the
Mobile AP service.
utilities
➔
Connect storage to PC
.
2. If prompted, tap OK to turn USB debugging mode off.
3. Plug in a compatible USB cable to begin using the device
for mass storage mode.
VPN settings
Tethering
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage Virtual
Private Networks (VPNs).
This option allows you to share your phone’s mobile data
connection via a direct USB connection between your phone and
computer. A wireless version of this same functionality would be
the Mobile AP feature.
Important!: Before you can use a VPN you must establish and configure one.
Note: You can not mount your phone’s microSD card to your computer while
using the USB tethering feature. If additional software or USB drivers
are required, navigate to: http://www.samsung.com/us/support/
Changing Your Settings
206
Adding a VPN
To establish a L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based L2TP/IPSec):
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN protocol to
use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol), L2TP (Layer 2
Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-shared key based
L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).
2. Set the VPN server.
3. Set IPSEc pre-shared key.
4. Enable L2TP secret.
5. Set L2TP secret.
1. Press
Wireless and network
2. Tap Add VPN
➔
and then tap
VPN settings
(Settings) ➔
➔
.
.
6. Set the DNS search domains.
To establish a PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol):
To establish a L2TP/IPSec CRT (Certificate based L2TP/IPSec):
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
2. Set the VPN server.
2. Set the VPN server.
3. Enable L2TP secret.
4. Set L2TP secret.
3. Enable encryption (if desired).
4. Set the DNS search domains.
To establish a L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol):
5. Set user certificate.
1. Establish a VPN name (a name for this connection).
Note: A user certificate must be installed to use this setting.
2. Set the VPN server.
3. Enable L2TP secret.
4. Set L2TP secret.
6. Set CA certificate.
Note: A CA certificate must be installed to use this setting.
5. Set the DNS search domains.
7. Set the DNS search domains.
207
Data Roaming
Near Field Communication
This feature is used to read and exchange tags. For more
Data roaming allows you to connect to your service provider’s
partner networks and access data services when you are out of
your service providers area of coverage.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
.
(Settings) ➔
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
Wireless and network
➔
Mobile networks
.
2. Tap the NFC field. A check mark displayed next to the
2. Tap Data roaming to connect to data services while
roaming outside your network.
– or –
feature indicating it is enabled.
Mobile networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the
Mobile networks options.
Tap Data roaming again to remove the green check mark
and deactivate the feature.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Access Point Names
Wireless and network
➔
Mobile networks
.
To access a wireless access point:
The following options display:
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Use packet data
Wireless and network
➔
Mobile networks
➔
Access Point
Allows you to activate data usage on your phone.
Names. A list of the Access point names display. The active
access point displays a bright green, filled circle to the
right of the name.
ᮣ
Press
Wireless and network
Use packet data
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
Mobile networks
➔
.
Changing Your Settings
208
Using the 2G (EDGE) Network
Network mode
You can configure your phone to either manually detect and use
either a 2G (GSM) or 3G (WCDMA) data network connection.
If you are not using applications that require the 3G network
speed (any application that accesses the network or uses a
browser), using the 2G network saves battery life.
ᮣ
Press
Wireless and network
Mode
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Network
1. Press
Wireless and network
mode
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Network
➔
Mobile networks
➔
➔
Mobile networks
➔
.
.
Using the 4G Network
2. Tap GSM only. A check mark displays next to this option to
To confirm you are always using the fastest possible connection,
the phone has an automatic detection method where it finds both
the fastest and most stable connection/communication method.
This phone is capable of using either 4G/3G services for this
connection.
indicate that it is active.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
Using the 3G Network
Note: WCDMA is only available on the 4G network.
If you are using applications that require the 3G network speed,
follow these instructions to connect to the 3G network.
1. Press
Wireless and network
Mode
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Network
1. Press
Wireless and network
mode
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Network
➔
Mobile networks
➔
➔
Mobile networks
➔
.
.
2. Tap GSM/WCDMA (auto mode). A check mark displays next
to this option to indicate that it is active. This is the default
mode for this phone.
2. Tap WCDMA only. A check mark displays next to this option
to indicate that it is active.
209
Network Operators
Default Setup Options
Using this feature you can view the current network connection.
You can also scan and select a network operator manually, or set
the network selection to Automatic.
Your phone default is set to Automatic (to automatically search
for an available network. You can set this option to Manual to
select a network each time you connect.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
1. Press
Wireless and network
operators
2. Tap Default setup
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Wireless and network
➔
Mobile networks
.
➔
Mobile networks
➔
Network
.
2. Tap Network operators. The current network connection
displays at the bottom of the list.
.
3. Tap Manual to locate and connect to a network manually.
Important!: You must deactivate data service prior to searching for an
– or –
available network.
Tap Automatic to allow the device to automatically select a
3. Tap Search now to manually search for a network.
network.
4. Tap Select automatically to automatically select a network
connection.
Note: Connecting to 2G networks slows the data transfer speed and time.
Changing Your Settings
210
• Call alert: allows you to assign call alert tones and activate call
Call Settings
To access the Call settings menu:
alerts and vibration.
–
–
Answer vibration: vibrates the phone when the called party answers.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔Call.
Call status tones: assigns sounds settings during the call. Choose
– or –
from: Call connect tone, Minute minder, and Call end tone.
–
Alerts on call: selects whether alarm and message notification is
turned off during a call.
From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
Call
.
.
Configuring General Call Settings
• Call answering/ending: allows you to manage the settings for
answering and ending calls.
Configure the general call settings using this option.
–
–
Answering key allows you to press a key to answer the phone.
1. From the Home screen, tap
➔
Settings
➔
Call
Automatic answering, when connected, automatically answers a call
via the headset after a period of time. Selections are: Off, after 1
second, after 2 seconds, after 3 seconds, after 4 seconds, or after
5 seconds.
2. Tap one of the following options:
• Call rejection: allows you to manage your rejection mode and
rejection list.
–
Power key ends calls allows you to press the power key to end the
current call.
–
–
Auto reject mode: sets the phone to automatically reject incoming
calls or messages.
• Turn on proximity sensor: allows you to turn off the LCD when the
phone is near your face during a call so you do not accidentally tap
a key.
Auto reject list: provides access to current rejection entries and
numbers.
• Set reject messages: allows you to manage both existing rejection
messages and create new ones.
• Call forwarding: configures call forwarding options.
211
• Hearing aids: allows you to enable/disable hearing aid
TTY Mode
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone) is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to
communicate by telephone.
• Additional settings: allows you to configure additional call settings.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check
with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it is
compatible with digital cell phones.
Configuring Call Forwarding
1. Press
Call
2. Tap an available option:
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
Call Forwarding
.
Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that
plugs into your phone’s headset jack. If this cable was not
provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
• Always forward: incoming calls are re-routed to a secondary
number that you specify.
• Forward when busy: forwards all your calls to voicemail when your
1. Press
Call
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
phone is busy.
➔
TTY mode.
• Forward when unanswered: automatically forwards to your
voicemail number when the phone is not answered, and otherwise
allows you to enter a voicemail number.
2. Tap Full TTY to activate the feature, or TTY mode off to
deactivate the feature. Off is the default setting.
• Forward when unreachable: automatically forwards to your
voicemail number when the phone is not in service, or is turned off.
Changing Your Settings
212
HAC Mode
Fixed Dialing Numbers
This menu is used to activate or deactivate Hearing Aid
Compatibility for this device.
Fixed Dial Number (FDN), allows you to restrict outgoing calls to a
limited set of phone numbers.
Enabling FDN
1. Press
Call
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
1. Press
Call
2. Tap Enable FDN
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
Additional settings Fixed Dialing Numbers.
➔
2. Tap the Hearing aids field to activate the feature (green
check mark), or tap it again to deactivate the feature. Off is
the default setting.
.
.
Configuring Additional Voice Call Settings
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
1. Press
Call
2. Tap one of the following options:
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
menu does not display.
➔
Additional settings
.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering an incorrect
PIN2 code could cause the phone to lock. Contact customer
service for assistance.
• Caller ID: chooses whether your number is displayed when
someone answers your outgoing call. Choose from: Network
default, Hide number, or Show number.
• Call barring: blocks specific types of calls (All outgoing calls,
International calls, etc..).
• Call waiting: notifies you of an incoming call while you are on
another call.
• Auto redial: automatically redial the dialed number if it is unable to
connect or the call is cut off.
• Fixed Dialing Numbers: see description below.
213
Changing the PIN2 Code
4. Tap FDN list then press
and then tap Add contact or
edit the contacts that were stored.
1. Press
Call
2. Tap Change PIN2
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
Additional settings Fixed Dialing Numbers.
➔
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
.
menu does not display.
3. At the prompt, enter your old PIN2 code.
4. At the prompt, enter a new PIN2 code.
5. Confirm your PIN2 code.
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering the PIN2
incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock. Contact
customer service for assistance.
Voicemail
You can view your voicemail number from this menu.
Important!: Not all SIM cards use a PIN2 code. If your SIM card does not, this
menu does not display.
1. Press
Call
2. Tap My carrier
3. Tap Voicemail
number within the Voicemail number field.
Sound Settings
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
The PIN2 code is provided by your carrier. Entering the PIN2
incorrectly three times will cause the device to lock. Contact
customer service for assistance.
➔
Voicemail service
.
.
➔
Voicemail number to now view your
Managing the FDN List
When this feature is enabled, you can make calls only to phone
numbers stored in the FDN list on the SIM card.
1. Press
Call
2. Tap Enable FDN
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
From this menu you can control the sounds on the phone as well
as configure the display settings.
➔
Additional settings Fixed Dialing Numbers.
➔
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
Sound
.
3. At the prompt, enter your PIN2 code and tap OK
.
The following options display:
FDN is enabled.
Changing Your Settings
214
Silent mode
Note: The Phone vibrate setting is independent of other call sounds settings.
For example, if you have Silent mode enabled along with Phone
vibrate, your phone won’t play a ringtone, but will vibrate for an
incoming call.
Silent mode is convenient when you wish to stop the phone from
making noise, in a theater for example. In Silent Mode the
speaker is muted and the phone only vibrates to notify you of
incoming calls, or other functions that normally have a defined
tone or sound as an alert.
Note: Use both the Silent mode and enable the Only when not in silent mode
option to guarantee no vibrations or sounds from your phone.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Adjusting the Volume Settings
Sound
.
The Volume menu now provides access to various volume
settings within one on-screen popup menu.
2. Tap Silent mode
.
– or –
1. Press
Volume
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound
From the Home screen, press and hold the Lock key until
➔
.
Phone options displays.
2. Touch and drag the on-screen slider to assign the volume
3. Tap Silent mode to activate or deactivate this mode (the
settings for any of the following volume levels.
current mode displays).
• Incoming call
,
Media
,
System, or Notification
.
Setup Phone Vibration
3. Tap OK to assign the volume levels.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Setup the Voice Call Ringtone
Sound.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
2. Tap Vibration and select a vibration mode. Choose from:
Always Never Only in silent mode, or Only when not in silent
mode
Sound
.
,
,
2. Tap Phone ringtone
.
.
215
3. Tap a ringtone from the available list. The ringtone briefly
Screen Lock Sounds
plays when selected.
The screen lock sounds option is used to activate/deactivate
sounds when locking and unlocking the screen.
4. Tap OK to assign a ringer.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Setting a Notification Ringtone
Sound
.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Sound
2. Tap Screen lock sounds. A check mark displayed next to
➔
Notification ringtone
.
these features indicates active status.
2. Tap one of the ringtones and tap OK
.
Haptic Feedback and Vibration Intensity
Audible Tone Settings
Instead of sounding a tone, the Haptic feedback option vibrates
when you press soft keys on certain screens. You can also set the
intensity of the vibration using the Vibration intensity setting.
The Audible touch tones and Audible selection options are used
when you use the dialing pad or making a screen selection. Each
time you press a key or make a selection the selected tone
sounds.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Sound.
1. Press
Sound
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
2. Tap Haptic feedback. A check mark displayed next to the
feature indicates Haptic feedback
is active.
.
2. Tap Audible touch tones or Audible selection. A check mark
displayed next to these features indicates active status.
3. Tap Vibration intensity then touch and drag the slider to
adjust the vibration intensity, then tap OK
.
Changing Your Settings
216
Display Settings
In this menu, you can change various settings for the display
such as the font, orientation, pop-up notifications, puzzle lock
feature, animation, brightness, screen timeout, and power saving
mode.
• Auto-rotate screen: when enabled, the phone automatically
switches from portrait to landscape orientation and vice versa.
When this setting is disabled, the phone displays in portrait mode
only.
Adjusting the Screen Display
• Animation: determines whether some or all of the window
elements animate. Selections are: No animations, Some
animations, or All animations.
1. Press
Display
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
2. Configure the following screen display settings:
• Screen timeout: adjusts the delay time before the screen
automatically turns off. Selections are: 15 seconds, 30 seconds,
1 minute, 2 minutes, 10 minutes, and 30 minutes.
• Screen display
–
Font style: sets the fonts used on the LCD display. Selections are:
Default font or Get fonts online. Tap Get fonts online to download
additional fonts.
• Touch key light duration: to adjust the light duration of the touch
keys.
• Auto adjust screen power: adjusts the phone’s LCD brightness
level to automatically adjust and conserve battery power.
–
–
–
–
Home screen Wallpaper: assigns an image from either the Gallery,
Live wallpapers, or Wallpaper gallery to the Home screen.
• Horizontal calibration: uses the accelerometer to calibrate the
phone when held in a horizontal position.
Lock screen Wallpaper: assigns an image from either the
Wallpaper gallery or Gallery to the Lock screen.
• Gyroscope calibration: uses the built-in gyroscope to calibrate
motion when the phone is in motion.
Lock screen Clock position: assigns the on-screen clock position
to either the top, MIddle or Bottom of the screen.
Lock screen Event notifications: assigns what type of on-screen
notification you are prompted with. Choose from either: New
messages or New emails.
217
Adjusting Screen Brightness
Gyro Sensor Calibration
This feature configures the LCD Brightness levels.
Calibrate your phone by using the built-in gyroscope.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
.
(Settings) ➔
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Display
➔
Brightness
Display
➔
Gyroscope calibration
.
2. Tap Automatic brightness to allow the phone to self-adjust
2. Place the phone on a level surface and tap Calibrate. The
phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the
calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and
the center circle adjusts to the center position.
and tap OK
.
– or –
Touch and slide the on-screen slider to adjust the level and
tap OK
.
Power Saving Mode
This feature allows you both automatically set the phone to use a
power saving mode and configure additional power saving
options manually, all in an effort to conserve battery power.
Horizontal Calibration
Calibrate your phone by using the built-in accelerometer.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ Power
Display
➔
Horizontal calibration
.
saving mode
.
2. Place the phone on a level surface and tap Calibrate. The
phone adjusts the level of the accelerometer. During the
calibration process a green circle appears on-screen and
the center circle adjusts to the center position.
2. Confirm
appears at the top of the screen. This
indicates the power saving mode is active.
Changing Your Settings
218
To automatically enable power saving options:
1. Press and then tap
saving mode
To activate additional power saving features:
➔
(
Settings) ➔ Power
1. Activate Power saving mode.
.
2. Tap any of the available fields to activate additional power
saving parameters. Choose from:
2. Tap Use Power saving mode to enable this feature when the
battery level is low.
• Turn Off Wi-Fi to disable Wi-Fi when it is not connected to an AP.
• Turn Off Bluetooth to disable Bluetooth when not in use or actively
3. Tap Power saving mode on at to assign the “battery low”
level at which the power saving mode is activated. It is at
this level that the automatic power saving function will
“kick in”.
transmitting data.
• Turn Off GPS to disable the GPS location system when not in use.
• Turn off Sync to disable the feature when the phone is not
synchronizing with the server.
4. Tap OK to store the new battery level.
• Screen timeout to adjust the time delay before the screen turns off.
• Power saving tips to display additional on-screen power saving
information.
219
Enabling the sensor aiding
Location and Security
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
The Location and Security settings allow you to configure phone
location and security settings.
Location and security. For more information, refer to
Using Wireless Networks
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find your
location or search for places of interest, you must enable the Use
wireless networks option or enable the GPS satellites.
2. Tap Use sensor aiding enhances positioning and save
power while using the sensors.
Screen Unlock Pattern Settings
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
To secure data and limit phone access, set the phone to require a
screen unlock pattern each time you turn on the device, or every
time the phone wakes up from sleep mode (when the screen
automatically turns off).
Location and security
.
2. Tap Use wireless networks to enable location information
using the wireless network.
Setting an Unlock Pattern
Enabling the GPS Satellites
Creating a screen unlock pattern increases security on the
phone. When you enable the User visible pattern field, you will
draw an unlock pattern on the screen whenever you want to
unlock the phone’s buttons or touch screen. When you activate
the User tactile feedback field, you feel vibration as feedback
while drawing the pattern.
1. Press
Location and security
2. Tap Use GPS satellites enable the GPS satellite.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
Note: Make sure the Require Pattern field is activated.
Changing Your Settings
220
1. Press
Location and security
2. Tap Set up screen lock
3. Read the instructions then tap Next
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
Changing the Screen Lock Pattern
.
This feature allows you to change the previously stored unlock
pattern and update it if necessary. This process is similar to
changing your password from time to time.
➔
Pattern.
.
1. Press
Location and security
2. Tap Change screen lock
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
4. Review the onscreen animation procedure for drawing a
.
pattern and tap Next when you are ready to draw a pattern.
.
5. Draw your pattern by touching your first on-screen point.
Then, without removing your finger from the screen, drag
your finger over adjacent points until the gray trace line
overlaps each point and they are highlighted with a green
circle.
3. Retrace your current pattern on the screen.
4. Tap Pattern and repeat steps 3 - 7 from the previous
section.
Using a Visible Pattern
When enabled, this feature displays the onscreen lock grid that is
used to unlock the phone.
6. When you have connected at least four dots in a vertical,
horizontal or diagonal direction, lift your finger from the
Using Tactile Feedback
screen and tap Continue
.
When enabled, the User tactile feedback option, you will feel
vibration as feedback while drawing the pattern, using a PIN or
password lock.
7. Confirm the new pattern by redrawing it and then tapping
Confirm. The Unlock pattern is set.
221
PIN Lock and Unlock
Setting up SIM Card Lock
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Prevent another user from using your SIM card to make
unauthorized calls or from accessing information stored on your
SIM card by protecting the information using a PIN code.
Location and security
.
2. Tap Set up screen lock
.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
3. Tap PIN
.
Location and security
.
4. Enter a PIN number using the numeric keypad and touch
2. Tap Set up SIM card lock
.
Continue to confirm the password.
3. Tap Lock SIM card, enter your SIM PIN code, then tap OK
.
5. Confirm the PIN by re-entering it and tap OK to confirm.
Note: You must activate Lock SIM card before you can change your SIM PIN
Your phone now requires you to enter this PIN number in
order to unlock the phone.
code.
To change an existing SIM Card PIN:
Password Lock and Unlock
1. Tap Change SIM PIN
2. Enter the old SIM PIN code and tap OK
3. Enter the new SIM PIN code and tap OK
4. Re-type the new SIM PIN code and tap OK
.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
Location and security
.
.
2. Tap Set up screen lock
.
.
3. Tap Password
.
4. Enter a password using the keypad and tap Continue to
confirm the password.
5. Confirm the password by re-entering it and tap OK to
confirm.
Changing Your Settings
222
Password Settings
Credential Storage
When you create a phone password you can also configure the
phone to display the password as you type it instead of using an
asterisk (*).
This option allows certain applications to access secure
certificates and other credentials. Certificates and credentials
can be installed to the SD card and password protected.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(
Settings) ➔
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Location and security
.
Location and security
.
2. Tap Visible passwords to activate this feature.
2. Tap Use secure credentials to activate this feature. A check
mark displayed next to the feature indicates secure
credentials is active.
Device Administration
Activating this feature allows Google to administrate your phone
in a way similar to IT security settings on a corporate PC. This
would be beneficial in the case that your phone was lost or
stolen. The phone could be “deactivated” or “restricted” (through
administration) from a remote location.
3. Tap Install from USB storage to install encrypted certificates
from the USB Storage location.
4. Tap Set password to set or change the credential storage
password.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
5. Tap Clear storage to clear the storage (SD card or phone
memory) of all contents and reset the credentials
password.
Location and security
.
2. Tap Select device administrators to begin configuring this
setting.
3. Select an administrator device and follow the prompts.
223
Managing Applications
Applications
This phone can be used for Android development. You can write
applications in the SDK and install them on this device, then run
the applications using the hardware, system, and network. This
feature allows you to configure the device for development.
This feature allows you to manage installed applications. You can
view and control currently running services, or use the device for
application development.
You can also view the amount of memory or resources used as
well as the remaining memory and resources for each of the
applications on your phone and clear the data, cache, or defaults.
Warning!: Android Dev Phones are not intended for non-developer
end-users. Because the device can be configured with system
software not provided by or supported by Google or any other
company, end-users operate these devices at their own risk.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Applications
➔
Manage applications.
Unknown Sources
Clearing Application Cache and Data
Before you can download a web application you must enable the
Unknown sources feature (enables downloading). Developers can
use this option to install non-Market applications.
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this
feature.
1. Press
Applications
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
1. Press
Applications
➔
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
Manage applications
.
2. Tap Unknown sources to active this feature.
2. Tap an application in which to clear the cache or data.
3. Tap Force stop, Clear data, or Clear cache
.
Note: If you are notified that you can not download a Market application
because it comes from an “Unknown source”, enabling this option
corrects this issue.
Changing Your Settings
224
Uninstalling Third-party Applications
Moving Third-party Applications to your SD Card
Your phone’s built in memory is augmented by using a microSD
card to store additional data. When the phone’s built-in memory
capacity is reached, it can be possible to move some applications
over to the internal microSD card. Freeing up memory space on
the phone can help avoid any sluggish performance when the
phone has to work harder to manage memory resources.
Important!: You must have downloaded applications installed to use this
feature.
1. Press
Applications
➔
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Manage applications
.
2. Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired
Important!: Only certain downloaded applications are capable of being
application.
moved from phone to card.
3. Tap Uninstall (from within the top area of the Application
1. Press
Applications
➔
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
info page).
Manage applications
.
4. At the prompt, tap OK to uninstall the application.
2. Tap the Downloaded tab and select your desired
5. Select a reason for uninstalling the application, then tap
application.
OK.
3. Tap Move to SD card (from within the Storage section of the
Application info page).
Once the application has been moved to the microSD card, this
button now reads “Move to phone”.
225
Running Services
Memory Usage
The Running services option allows you to view and control
currently running services such as Backup, Google Talk, SNS
(messaging), Swype, and more.
This option allows you to view a list of the memory usage for
currently active applications.
1. Press
Applications
➔
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
1. Press
Applications
➔
➔
and then tap
Running services
(Settings) ➔
Memory usage. The All tab is opened and
.
displays a list of the current applications.
2. Press and then tap Sort by name/size to change the
The screen displays all the processes that are running.
list from being sorted either alphabetically or by largest
memory usage.
2. Tap a process to stop the process from running.
When you stop the process the service or application will
no longer run until you start the process or application
again.
Battery Usage
This option allows you to view a list of those components using
battery power.
Important!: Stopping a process might have undesirable consequences on the
1. Press
Applications
➔
➔
and then tap
Battery use
(Settings) ➔
application.
.
2. Press
and then tap Refresh to update the list.
– or –
Tap an entry to view more detailed information.
Changing Your Settings
226
Android Development
Accounts and Synchronization
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Your phone provides the ability to synchronize data from a variety
of different sources or sites. These accounts can range from
Google, a Corporate Microsoft Exchange Email Server, and other
social sites such as Facebook, Twitter, and MySpace. Corporate
and Google accounts provide the ability to synchronize Calendar
events and Contacts.
Applications
➔
Development
.
Important!: These features are used for development purposes only.
USB Debugging
To enable the auto-sync feature:
This feature is used for development purposes only.
Allowing Mock Locations
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accounts and sync
.
This feature is used for development purposes only.
2. Tap Auto-sync. A green checkmark indicates the feature is
enabled. This feature enables the synchronization of data
between your phone and external sites or servers.
If you are a developer who is testing a GPS applications using
this device, you can tell the device that the phone is at different
GPS locations. In other words, the phone is allowed to “mock”
the coordinates.
•
The three main components are Contacts Email, and Calendar
Events. Before these can be synchronized, they must be added to
the managed accounts list.
• Background data: allows your phone to use data in the
background.
227
Synchronizing a Google Account
To configure the Google management settings:
1. Press and then tap
Accounts and sync
2. Tap within the Google account field to reveal the
➔
(Settings) ➔
By default, there are no accounts managed by the device. These
must be manually added.
.
To manage an existing Google account
1. Press and then tap
Accounts and sync
2. Tap Add account
3. Tap Next Sign in
:
➔
(Settings) ➔
account’s synchronization settings screen.
.
3. Tap the parameters you wish to synchronize (Sync Books
,
➔
Google.
Sync Contacts
,
Sync Gmail, or Sync Calendar). A green
checkmark indicates the feature is enabled.
➔
.
4. Press
to return to the previous screen.
Note: If you do not already have a Google account, tap Create and follow the
on-screen prompts to create your new account.
4. Tap the Username (@gmail.com) and Password fields and
enter your information.
5. Tap Sign in. Your phone then communicates with the
Google servers to confirm your information. Your existing
Gmail account then appears within the Manage accounts
area of the screen.
•
Any changes or updates to your Gmail account are then
automatically updated to your device.
Changing Your Settings
228
Synchronizing Your Corporate Account
Motion Settings
By default, there are no Corporate Calendar events managed by
the device. These must be manually added.
This feature allows you to assign specific functions to certain
phone actions that are detected by both the accelerometer and
gyroscope.
Note: Once a corporate email account is created, it is automatically added as
To activate motion:
a managed account.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Use the following procedure to configure your phone to
synchronize with a corporate email account.
Motion
➔
Motion activation
.
1. From the Home screen, tap
(Applications)➔ Settings
Note: If Motion activation is not enabled, all motion services are greyed-out
and disabled.
➔
Accounts and sync
.
– or –
Press
To activate different motion functions:
1. Activate and configure any of the following motion
features.
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accounts and sync
.
• Turn over activates the mute function for incoming calls and
2. Locate the email account containing the events you wish to
playing sounds.
synchronize.
• Tilt reduces or enlarges the screen while in the Gallery or Browser.
3. Tap
within the adjacent account field to reveal the
–
Adjust the sensitivity slider and tap OK.
account’s synchronization settings screen.
• Panning allows you to move icons one at a time, to another page in
the Home or Applications pages.
4. Toggle the check mark adjacent to either the Sync Contacts
–
Adjust the sensitivity slider and tap OK.
or Sync Calendar fields to manually sync the account.
229
• Double tap allows you to activate voice commands within Voice
Prior to doing a Factory Reset
talk.
Before using Kies air to upgrade your device or initiating a factory
reset, it is recommended that you backup your personal data
prior to use.
• Tutorials provide on-screen visual explanations of the above
features.
Privacy Settings
Location settings, backup configurations, or reset the phone to
erase all personal data.
To export a Contact list to your microSD card:
1. From the Home screen, tap
2. Press and then tap Import/Export
3. Tap Export to SD card
(Contacts).
.
ᮣ
Press
Privacy
Mobile Backup and Restore
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
.
Verify your images and videos are on your microSD card:
The phone can be configured to back up your current settings,
application data and settings.
1. From the Home screen, tap
Gallery).
(Applications) ➔
(
1. Press
Privacy
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
.
2. Verify the Gallery contains all of your pictures and videos.
2. Tap Back up my data to create a backup of your current
3. Remove the back cover and remove the internal microSD
phone settings and applications.
card prior to initiating a Kies air update.
3. Tap Automatic restore to assist in the re-installation of a
previously installed application (including preferences and
data).
Changing Your Settings
230
Factory Data Reset
To view the memory allocation for your external SD card:
Press and then tap Settings) ➔
ᮣ
➔
(
From this menu you can reset your phone and sound settings to
the factory default settings.
Storage.The available memory displays under the Total
1. Press
Privacy. (You will see a disclaimer.)
2. Tap Factory data reset Reset phone.
3. If necessary, enter your password and touch Erase
everything
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
space and Available space headings.
Search Settings
➔
You can use your phone's search preferences to configure some
aspects of Google Web search (for example, whether it makes
suggestions below the Quick Search Box as you type), and what
phone features you want to include in searches.
.
The phone resets to the factory default settings
automatically and when finished displays the Home
screen.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
Search settings
(Search).
2. Press
➔
.
3. Tap any of the following search parameters to then alter
Note: Select Format USB storage to also erase all data on the USB storage.
the settings:
• Google search opens a screen where you can set your Google
search preferences.
SD Card & Phone Storage
From this menu you can view the memory allocation for the
memory card as well as mount or unmount the SD card.
–
–
–
–
Show web suggestions: includes search matches from Google’s
online search engine.
Use My Location: uses your My Location information for Google
search results and services.
For more information about mounting or unmounting the SD card,
Search history: determines whether you also wish to included
personalized search history results in the list of matches.
Manage search history: helps to manage the personalized search
history associated with your current registered Google account.
231
• Searchable items: opens a screen where you can choose the
Select Input Method
search categories included in device searches. such as: Web,
There are two input methods available: Swype and Samsung
keypad.
Apps
,
Contacts, Memo, Messaging, Music, Slacker, or
Voice Search
.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
• Clear shortcuts: erases the history for recently selected search
results.
Language and keyboard
2. Select an input method.
Swype Settings
➔
Select input method.
Language & Keyboard Settings
This setting allows you to configure the language in which to
display the menus. You can also set on-screen keyboard options.
1. Press and then tap Settings) ➔
Language and keyboard Swype
ᮣ
Press
Language and keyboard
Language Settings
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
➔
(
.
➔
.
2. Tap one of the following Swype preferences to activate the
To set the language that the menus display on the phone:
1. Press and then tap Settings) ➔
Language and keyboard Select language
2. Select a language and region from the list.
setting:
➔
(
• Language: allows you to select the current text input language.
Default language is US English.
➔
.
• Audio feedback: turns off sounds generated by the Swype
application.
• Vibrate on keypress: activates a vibration sensation as you enter
text using the keypad.
• Show tips: turns on an on-screen flashing indicator that provides
helpful user information.
Changing Your Settings
232
Swype Advanced settings
About
Advanced settings provide access to Swype operation
parameters.
Provides information about the current Swype application
version.
• Word suggestion: uses a built-in word database to predict words
Samsung Keyboard Settings
while entering text in Swype.
1. Press
Language and keyboard
2. Tap Portrait Keypad types and select a text input method:
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
• Auto-spacing: automatically inserts a space between words.
When you finish a word, just lift your finger or stylus and start the
next word.
➔
Samsung keypad
.
• Auto-capitalization: automatically capitalizes the first letter of a
sentence.
•
•
Qwerty Keypad
3x4 Keypad
• Show complete trace: determines whether or not to display the
complete Swype trace path on-screen.
3. Tap Input languages and select a language.
• Speed vs. accuracy: sets how quickly Swype responds to
on-screen input. Move the slider between Fast Response (speed) or
Error Tolerant (accuracy) and tap OK
.
• Personal dictionary: helps to manage your personal dictionary.
• Reset Swype’s dictionary: once enabled, deletes any words you
have added to Swype’s dictionary.
5. Tap the Keypad sweeping field if you want to sweep the
keypad and change from ABC to ?123 mode. For more
Swype Help settings
Help settings provide access to Swype help operation
parameters.
6. Tap the Character preview field to automatically preview
• Swype help: displays the on-screen Swype User Manual.
new characters prior to entry.
• Tutorial: provides an on-screen tutorial that shows you how to input
text faster in Swype input mode.
233
7. Tap the Auto-capitalization field to automatically capitalize
4. Tap the Spell correction field. This option corrects
typographical errors by selecting from a list of possible
words that reflect the characters of the keys you touched
as well as the characters of nearby keys.
the first letter of a sentence.
8. Tap Voice input to activate the Voice input feature. This is
an experimental feature that uses Google’s networked
speech recognition application.
5. Tap the Next word prediction field to enable word
prediction.
9. Tap Auto-full stop to automatically insert a full stop by
tapping the space bar twice.
6. Tap the Auto-append field to automatically add predictions.
10. Tap the Tutorial field to view a short tutorial on use of the
7. Tap the Auto-substitution field to automatically replace
words that you are typing. This option assists with
correcting misspelled words.
Samsung keyboard.
XT9 Advanced Settings
8. Tap the Regional correction field. This option sets the
device to automatically correct mistyped words according
to normal spelling for your region.
The following XT9 Advanced settings are available when the XT9
field is selected.
1. Tap the XT9 field to select XT9 (predictive text) mode, then
tap XT9 advanced settings
.
9. Tap the Recapture field. This option sets the device to
re-display the word suggestion list when you select the
wrong word from the list.
2. Tap the Word completion field to enable word completion.
Your phone predicts how to complete the word typed.
10. To add a new word to the T9 dictionary:
3. Tap the Word completion point field then touch 2 letters
,
3
Tap the XT9 my words field, then press
Add. Enter the new word in the Register to XT9 my words
field, then tap Done
and then tap
letters 4 letters, or the 5 letters radio button. Word
,
completion begins after 2 or more (depending on your
selection).
.
Changing Your Settings
234
11. Tap XT9 auto-substitution to add words to substitute (for
example youve becomes you’ve). A list of substitutions
displays.
• Block offensive words: allows you to block recognition of known
offensive words or language. (A green check mark indicates the
feature is active).
3. Press
to return to the previous screen.
12. If you do not see the substitution you want, press
and then tap Add, then input the Shortcut word and
Substitution word.
Configuring Text-to-speech
This feature allows the phone to provide a verbal readout of
on-screen data such as messages and incoming caller
information. This action is called TTS (Text To Speech).
13. Tap Done
.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Voice Input and Output Settings
Configuring Voice Input Recognition
Voice input and output
➔
Text-to-speech settings
.
2. Configure the available options to alter the settings
This feature allows the phone to correctly recognize verbal input.
associated with this feature:
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
• Listen to an example: plays a short example of what the text-to-
Voice input and output
➔
Voice recognition settings
.
speech feature sounds like on your device when activated.
2. Configure the available options to alter the settings
• Driving mode: incoming calls and new notifications are
automatically ready out loud.
associated with this feature:
• Language: selects an input language and associated dialect
• Driving mode settings: selects those applications that will use TTS
while driving mode is activated. Choose from: Incoming call,
Message, New emails, New voicemail, Alarm, Schedule, or Unlock
screen.
recognition (if available).
• SafeSearch: sets the explicit image filter settings. These settings
apply to only Google voice search results. Choose from: Off
,
Moderate, or Strict
.
• Always use my settings: accepts an override of application
settings with personal configurations for this text-to-speech settings
screen. If enabled, your device defaults to using the text-to-speech
feature.
235
• Default engine: sets the speech synthesis engine that will be used
for the spoken text. Choices include: Pico TTS
Note: Initially, it might be necessary to download accessibility applications
.
from the Android Market.
• Install voice data: confirms the installation of necessary data
required for voice synthesis.
2. Tap Accessibility to activate the feature, then select the
• Speech rate: adjusts the rate at which on-screen text is spoken by
services for which you want data to log.
the device. Choose from: Very slow
,
Slow, Normal, Fast, and Very
3. Select The power key ends calls field to activate this feature
fast.
which ends any current calls.
• Language: assigns the language used for verbal readout. Choose
from German (Germany), English (United Kingdom), English (United
States), Spanish (Spain), French (France), or Italian (Italy).
Dock Settings
This menu allows you to assign external speakers when the
device is docked.
• Samsung TTS: configures the Samsung TTS settings for various
languages.
• Pico TTS: configures the pico TTS settings for various languages.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accessibility Settings
Dock settings
.
This service lets you enable and disable downloaded accessibility
applications that aid in navigating your Android device, such as
TalkBack (uses synthesized speech to describe the results of
actions), KickBack (provides haptic feedback for actions), and
SoundBack (plays sounds for various actions). Also lets you
enable use of the power key to end calls.
2. Tap Audio output mode. This enables the phone to output
audio when docked to a compatible device.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Accessibility
.
Changing Your Settings
236
Date and Time
About Phone
This menu allows you to change the current time and date
displayed.
This menu contains legal information, system tutorial
information, and other phone information such as the model
number, firmware version, baseband version, kernel version, and
software build number.
1. Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Date and time
.
To access phone information:
2. Tap Automatic to allow the network set the date and time.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔ About
phone. The following information displays:
Important!: Deactivate Automatic to manually set the rest of the options.
• Status: displays the battery status, the level of the battery
(percentage), the phone number for this device, the network
connection, signal strength, mobile network type, service state,
roaming status, mobile network state, IMEI number, IMEI SV, Wi-Fi
MAC address, Bluetooth address, and Up time.
3. Tap Set date and use the plus or minus icons to set the
Month Day, and Year then tap Set.
,
4. Tap Select time zone, then tap a time zone.
• Battery use: displays the applications or services (in percentages)
that are using battery power.
5. Tap Set time and use the plus or minus icons, set Hour, and
Minute. Tap PM or AM, then tap Set
.
• Legal information: This option displays information about Open
source licenses, License settings, as well as Google legal
information. This information clearly provides copyright and
distribution legal information and facts as well as Google Terms of
Service, Terms of Service for Android-powered Phones, and much
more pertinent information as a reference.
•
Optional: Touch Use 24-hour format. If this is not selected the
phone automatically uses a 12-hour format.
6. Tap Select date format and touch the date format type.
Read the information and terms, then press BACK to return to the
Settings menu.
237
Software Update
Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and information about
registering your device to play DivX protected video, tap License settings
The Software Update feature enables you to use your phone to
connect to the network and upload any new phone software
directly to your phone. The phone automatically updates with the
latest available software when you access this option.
➔
DivX® VOD.
• Model number: displays the device’s model number.
• Android version: displays the firmware version loaded on this
device.
ᮣ
Press
➔
and then tap
(Settings) ➔
Software update
.
• Baseband version: displays the baseband version loaded on this
device.
The phone automatically updates the software (if
available).
• Kernel version: displays the kernel version loaded on this device.
• Build number: displays the software, build number.
Note: Firmware, baseband, kernel and build numbers are usually used for
updates to the handset or support. For additional information please
contact your T-Mobile service representative.
Changing Your Settings
238
Section 13: Health and Safety Information
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with using
your phone. The terms “mobile device” or “cell phone” are used
in this section to refer to your phone. Read this information before
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at substantially
reduced time intervals when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high
levels of RF can produce health effects (by heating tissue),
exposure to low level RF that does not produce heating effects
causes no known adverse health effects.
using your mobile device
.
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication includes the
following information:
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in
X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues. Ionization
is a process where electrons are stripped away from their normal
locations in atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage
biological tissues including DNA, the genetic material.
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will cause
cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of scientific
evidence has not linked cell phones with any health problems.
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy. Over
the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds of studies
looking at the biological effects of the radio frequency energy
emitted by cell phones. While some researchers have reported
biological changes associated with RF energy, these studies have
failed to be replicated. The majority of studies published have
failed to show an association between exposure to radio
frequency from a cell phone and health problems.
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore,
RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation. Other types of
non-ionizing radiation include visible light, infrared radiation
(heat), and other forms of electromagnetic radiation with
relatively low frequencies.
239
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little blood
flow in them to carry away excess heat.
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused brain
cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk of brain
cancer from using cell phones. For people with the heaviest use
of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour per day, every
day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a slight increase in
brain cancer. However, the authors determined that biases and
errors prevented any conclusions being drawn from this data.
Additional information about Interphone can be found at
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection between
RF and certain health problems?
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In addition,
attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies that have
shown a connection have failed.
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did not
answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional research
is being conducted around the world, and the FDA continues to
monitor developments in this field.
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones and
adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community has
supported additional research to address gaps in knowledge.
Some of these studies are described below.
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users (COSMOS)
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health monitoring
of a large group of people to determine if there are any health
issues linked to long-term exposure to radio frequency energy
from cell phone use. The COSMOS study will follow
Interphone Study
Interphone is a large international study designed to determine
whether cell phones increase the risk of head and neck cancer. A
report published in the International Journal of Epidemiology
(June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for more than 5,000
people with brain tumors (glioma and meningioma) and a similar
number of healthy controls.
approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in Europe for 20 to
30 years. Additional information about the COSMOS study can be
found at http://www.ukcosmos.org/index.html
.
Health and Safety Information
240
RiskofBrainCancerfromExposuretoRadioFrequencyFields
in Childhood and Adolescence (MOBI-KIDS)
Cell Phone Industry Actions
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry to take a
number of steps, including the following:
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the relationship
between exposure to radio frequency energy from
communication technologies including cell phones and brain
cancer in young people. This is an international multi-center
study involving 14 European and non-European countries.
Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be found at
•
•
•
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF for
the type of signal emitted by cell phones;
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to the
user; and
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program
of the National Cancer Institute
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting bodies
such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE), the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure that safety standards
continue to adequately protect the public.
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk for
brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell phone use
has been common for quite some time in the U.S. Between 1987
and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence of brain cancer did
not increase. Additional information about SEER can be found at
http://seer.cancer.gov/
.
241
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free
kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for convenience
and comfort. They are also required by law in many states if you
want to use your phone while driving.
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency energy
(RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not know that
there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are concerned
about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple
steps to minimize your RF exposure.
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head from
RF Radiation
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions
from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories
which claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce
risks. Some products that claim to shield the user from RF
absorption use special phone cases, while others involve nothing
more than a metallic accessory attached to the phone. Studies
have shown that these products generally do not work as
advertised. Unlike “hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields”
may interfere with proper operation of the phone. The phone may
be forced to boost its power to compensate, leading to an
increase in RF absorption.
•
•
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between your
head and the cell phone.
Hands-Free Kits
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets and
various types of body-worn accessories such as belt-clips and
holsters. Combinations of these can be used to reduce RF energy
absorption from cell phones.
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the phone
is held away from the head in the user's hand or in approved
body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in the U.S. are
required to meet RF exposure compliance requirements when
used against the head and against the body.
Children and Cell Phones
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users of
cell phones from RF exposure, including children and teenagers.
The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure apply to
children and teenagers as well.
•
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;
Health and Safety Information
242
•
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between the
head and the cell phone.
•
•
•
•
World Health Organization (WHO):
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones at
all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United Kingdom
made such a recommendation in December 2000. In this report,
a group of independent experts noted that no evidence exists that
using a cell phone causes brain tumors or other ill effects. Their
recommendation to limit cell phone use by children was strictly
precautionary; it was not based on scientific evidence that any
health hazard exists.
Health Protection Agency:
US Food and Drug Administration:
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Certification
Information
Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is
designed and manufactured not to exceed the exposure limits for
Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) of the U.S. Government.
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from various
sources can be obtained from the following organizations
(updated 10/1/2010):
•
•
•
FCC RF Safety Program:
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):
These FCC exposure limits are derived from the
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP) and
the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)
In both cases, the recommendations were developed by scientific
and engineering experts drawn from industry, government, and
academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature
related to the biological effects of RF energy.
•
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):
243
The exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile phones
employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the rate of
absorption of RF energy by the human body expressed in units of
watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC requires wireless phones to
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).
For body-worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets
FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that
contains no metal and that positions the mobile device a
minimum of 1.0 cm from the body.
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF
exposure guidelines.
The FCC exposure limit incorporates a substantial margin of
safety to give additional protection to the public and to account
for any variations in measurements.
The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this mobile
phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance
with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values
for this model phone as reported to the FCC are:
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions
accepted by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest
certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the
SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual
SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the
maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to
operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power
required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output.
Cellular/PCS WCDMA/GSM/EDGE and AWS WCDMA
•
•
•
•
Head: 0.23 W/Kg.
Body-worn Accessory: 0.99 W/Kg.
Product Specific: 0.99 W/kg;
Simultaneous Transmission: 1.30 W/kg.
WLAN
•
•
•
•
Head: 0.35 W/Kg.
Body-worn Accessory: 0.31 W/Kg.
Product Specific: 0.10 W/kg;
Before a new model phone is available for sale to the public, it
must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does not exceed
the exposure limit established by the FCC. Tests for each model
phone are performed in positions and locations (e.g. at the ear
and worn on the body) as required by the FCC.
Simultaneous Transmission: 1.30 W/kg
Health and Safety Information
244
SAR information on this and other model phones can be viewed
pertains to a particular model phone, this site uses the phone
FCC ID number which is usually printed somewhere on the case
of the phone.
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning
the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Sometimes it may be necessary to remove the battery pack to
find the number. Once you have the FCC ID number for a
particular phone, follow the instructions on the website and it
should provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular
phone. Additional product specific SAR information can also be
-Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
obtained at www.fcc.gov/cgb/sar
.
-Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
FCC Part 15 Information to User
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned that
changes or modifications not expressly approved by Samsung
could void your authority to operate the device.
-Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
-Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for
help.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Smart Practices While Driving
On the Road - Off the Phone
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe operation of
his or her vehicle.
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task should be
performed while driving whether it be eating, drinking, talking to
passengers, or talking on a mobile phone - unless the driver has
assessed the driving conditions and is confident that the
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential
245
secondary task will not interfere with their primary responsibility.
Do not engage in any activity while driving a moving vehicle which
may cause you to take your eyes off the road or become so
absorbed in the activity that your ability to concentrate on the act
of driving becomes impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting
responsible driving and giving drivers the tools they need to
understand and address distractions.
•
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving;
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in an
automobile:
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in the
automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in an
automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could result
in fines, penalties, or other damages.
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices and
their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always obey them.
The use of these devices may be prohibited or restricted in certain
areas. For example, only hands-free use may be permitted in
certain areas.
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the
driver's clear view of the street and traffic.
Before answering calls, consider your circumstances. Let the call
go to voicemail when driving conditions require. Remember,
driving comes first, not the call!
Never use wireless data services such as text messaging, Web
browsing, or e-mail while operating a vehicle.
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video games
while operating a vehicle.
If you consider a call necessary and appropriate, follow these
tips:
.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Use a hands-free device;
Secure your phone within easy reach;
Place calls when you are not moving;
Plan calls when your car will be stationary;
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are driving
and will suspend the call if necessary;
Health and Safety Information
246
•
•
Do not handle a damaged or leaking battery. Do not let leaking
battery fluid come in contact with your eyes, skin or clothing. For safe
disposal options, contact your nearest Samsung-authorized service
center.
Battery Use and Safety
Important!: Handle and store batteries properly to avoid injury or damage
.
Most battery issues arise from improper handling of batteries
and, particularly, from the continued use of damaged batteries.
Avoid dropping the cell phone. Dropping the phone or the battery,
especially on a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the
phone and battery. If you suspect damage to the phone or battery, take
it to a service center for inspection.
•
•
Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, shred, or otherwise attempt
to change the form of your battery. Do not put a high degree of
pressure on the battery. This can cause leakage or an internal short-
circuit, resulting in overheating.
•
•
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.
Do not let the phone or battery come in contact with liquids.
Liquids can get into the phone's circuits, leading to corrosion. Even
when the phone appears to be dry and appears to operate normally,
the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a safety hazard. If the
phone and/or battery get wet, have them checked by your service
provider or contact Samsung, even if they appear to be working
properly.
Do not allow the battery to touch metal objects. Accidental
short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object (coin, key, jewelry,
clip, or pen) causes a direct connection between the + and - terminals
of the battery (metal strips on the battery), for example when you carry
a spare battery in a pocket or bag. Short-circuiting the terminals may
damage the battery or the object causing the short-circuiting.
Important!: Important: Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and recharge
your battery only with Samsung-approved chargers which are
specifically designed for your phone.
•
•
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive
heating can damage the phone or the battery and could cause the
phone or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp battery with
an appliance or heat source such as a microwave oven, hair dryer,
iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your phone in your car in high
temperatures.
Warning!: Warning: Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard
.
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the phone caused
by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or chargers.
Do not dispose of the phone or the battery in a fire. The phone or
the battery may explode when overheated.
247
•
•
Do not use incompatible cell phone batteries and chargers. Some
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories. If
unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is compatible,
contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.
Drop It Off
You can drop off your Samsung-branded mobile device and
batteries for recycling at one of our numerous Samsung
Recycling Direct (SM) locations. A list of these locations may be
.
Samsung-branded devices and batteries will be accepted at
these locations for no fee.
Misuse or use of incompatible phones, batteries, and charging
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a possible
risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious injuries,
Consumers may also recycle their used mobile device or
batteries at many retail or carrier-provided locations where
mobile devices and batteries are sold. Additional information
regarding specific locations may be found at:
damages to your phone, or other serious hazard
.
Samsung Mobile Products and Recycling
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine
Samsung accessories.
.
Mail It In
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not only
important for safety, it benefits the environment. Batteries must
be recycled or disposed of properly.
The Samsung Mobile Take-Back Program will provide Samsung
customers with a free recycling mailing label. Just go to
http://www.samsung.com/us/mobiletakeback and follow the
instructions to print out a free pre-paid postage label and then
send your old mobile device or battery to the address listed, via
U.S. Mail, for recycling.
Recycling programs for your mobile device, batteries, and
accessories may not be available in your area.
We've made it easy for you to recycle your old Samsung mobile
device by working with respected take-back companies in every
state in the country.
Health and Safety Information
248
Dispose of unwanted electronics through an approved recycler.
To find the nearest recycling location, go to our website:
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS.
Or call, (877) 278-0799.
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
Follow local regulations regarding disposal of mobile devices
and batteries
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR OF
THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER
OUTLET.
Dispose of your mobile device and batteries in accordance with
local regulations. In some areas, the disposal of these items in
household or business trash may be prohibited. Help us protect
the environment - recycle!
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY
ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR
MOUNT POSITION.
Warning!: Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may explode.
Display / Touch-Screen
Please note the following information when using your mobile
device:
UL Certified Travel Charger
The Travel Charger for this phone has met applicable UL safety
requirements. Please adhere to the following safety instructions
per UL guidelines:
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is dropped or
if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is
broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE
PROPERTY DAMAGE.
249
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A TOUCH-SCREEN
MOBILE DEVICE
Certain Samsung mobile devices can also use an Assisted Global
Positioning System (AGPS), which obtains information from the
cellular network to improve GPS performance. AGPS uses your
wireless service provider's network and therefore airtime, data
charges, and/or additional charges may apply in accordance with
your service plan. Contact your wireless service provider for
details.
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display, please
note that a touch-screen responds best to a light touch
from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic stylus. Using
excessive force or a metallic object when pressing on the
touch-screen may damage the tempered glass surface
and void the warranty. For more information, please refer
Your Location
Location-based information includes information that can be
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile device.
Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless network
transmit location-based information. Additionally, if you use
applications that require location-based information (e.g. driving
directions), such applications transmit location-based
information. The location-based information may be shared with
third-parties, including your wireless service provider,
applications providers, Samsung, and other third-parties
providing services.
GPS & AGPS
Certain Samsung mobile devices can use a Global Positioning
System (GPS) signal for location-based applications. A GPS uses
satellites controlled by the U.S. Government that are subject to
changes implemented in accordance with the Department of
Defense policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).
Changes may affect the performance of location-based
technology on your mobile device.
Health and Safety Information
250
Use of AGPS in Emergency Calls
Emergency Calls
When you make an emergency call, the cellular network may
activate AGPS technology in your mobile device to tell the
emergency responders your approximate location.
This mobile device, like any wireless mobile device, operates
using radio signals, wireless and landline networks, as well as
user-programmed functions, which cannot guarantee connection
in all conditions, areas, or circumstances. Therefore, you should
never rely solely on any wireless mobile device for essential
communications (medical emergencies, for example). Before
traveling in remote or underdeveloped areas, plan an alternate
method of contacting emergency services personnel. Remember,
to make or receive any calls, the mobile device must be switched
on and in a service area with adequate signal strength.
AGPS has limitations and might not work in your area. Therefore:
•
Always tell the emergency responder your location to the best of your
ability; and
•
Remain on the mobile device for as long as the emergency responder
instructs you.
Navigation
Maps, directions, and other navigation data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete data, and circumstances can and do
change over time. In some areas, complete information may not
be available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see
before following them. All users should pay attention to road
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may impact
Emergency calls may not be possible on all wireless mobile
device networks or when certain network services and/or mobile
device features are in use. Check with local service providers.
To make an emergency call:
1. If the phone is not on, switch it on.
2. From the Home screen, tap
. Enter the emergency
safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs
.
number for your present location (for example, 911 or
other official emergency number), then tap
Emergency numbers vary by location.
.
251
If certain features are in use (call blocking, for example), you may
first need to deactivate those features before you can make an
emergency call. Consult your User Manual and your local cellular
service provider. When making an emergency call, remember to
give all the necessary information as accurately as possible.
Remember that your mobile device may be the only means of
communication at the scene of an accident; do not cut off the call
until given permission to do so.
Extreme heat or cold
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C / 113°F.
Microwaves
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.
Dust and dirt
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.
Care and Maintenance
Cleaning solutions
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The suggestions
below will help you fulfill any warranty obligations and allow you
to enjoy this product for many years:
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft cloth
slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water solution.
Shock or vibration
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:
Liquids of any kind
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough
handling can break internal circuit boards.
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and liquids
contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If the
mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate drying with the
use of an oven, microwave, or dryer, because this may damage
the mobile device and could cause a fire or explosion. Do not
use the mobile device with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an
electric shock to you or damage to the mobile device.
Paint
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the device’s
moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent proper
operation.
Health and Safety Information
252
You should follow some common sense recommendations when
using any portable audio device:
Responsible Listening
Caution!: Avoid potential hearing loss
.
•
•
•
•
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an
audio source.
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as sound is
played louder and for longer durations. Prolonged exposure to
loud sounds (including music) is the most common cause of
preventable hearing loss. Some scientific research suggests that
using portable audio devices, such as portable music players and
cell phones, at high volume settings for long durations may lead
to permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth® or
other wireless devices). Exposure to very loud sound has also
been associated in some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the
ear), hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential hearing
problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound produced by a
portable audio device varies depending on the nature of the
sound, the device settings, and the headphones that are used. As
a result, there is no single volume setting that is appropriate for
everyone or for every combination of sound, settings, and
equipment.
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest volume at
which you can hear adequately.
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time, not
realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your hearing.
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot hear the
people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to you can hear
what you are listening to.
•
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment, use
noise-cancelling headphones to block out background environmental
noise. By blocking background environment noise, noise cancelling
headphones should allow you to hear the music at lower volumes than
when using earbuds.
•
•
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less time
is required before you hearing could be affected.
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises, such
as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss. Temporary
hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound normal.
253
•
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or experience
any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your portable audio
device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH)
395 E Street, S.W.
Suite 9200
Patriots Plaza Building
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the
following sources:
Washington, DC 20201
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH (1-800-356-4674)
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328
Email: [email protected]
American Academy of Audiology
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300
Reston, VA 20190
Voice: (800) 222-2336
Internet: http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/default.html
1-888-232-6348 TTY
Email: [email protected]
National Institute on Deafness and Other Communication Disorders
National Institutes of Health
Operating Environment
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area,
and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or danger.
When connecting the mobile device or any accessory to another
device, read its user's guide for detailed safety instructions. Do
not connect incompatible products.
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320
Email: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.nidcd.nih.gov/
Health and Safety Information
254
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic Devices
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-
faqs.html#
.
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic equipment
may not be shielded against the RF signals from your wireless
mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to discuss alternatives.
Other Medical Devices
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able to
assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your mobile
device off in health care facilities when any regulations posted in
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care
facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to
external RF energy.
Implantable Medical Devices
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an implantable
medical device, such as a pacemaker or implantable cardioverter
defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the device.
Persons who have such devices:
Vehicles
•
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches from
their implantable medical device when the mobile device is turned ON;
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with the
manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle before
using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You should also
consult the manufacturer of any equipment that has been added
to your vehicle.
•
•
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to
minimize the potential for interference;
•
•
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any reason
to suspect that interference is taking place;
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of your
implantable medical device. If you have any questions about using
your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical device,
consult your health care provider.
255
Posted Facilities
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices
On July 10, 2003, the U.S. Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) Report and Order in WT Docket 01-309 modified the
exception of wireless mobile devices under the Hearing Aid
Compatibility Act of 1988 (HAC Act) to require digital wireless
mobile devices be compatible with hearing aids.
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted notices
require you to do so.
Potentially Explosive Environments
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a potentially
explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Sparks
in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily
injury or even death. Users are advised to switch the mobile
device off while at a refueling point (service station). Users are
reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the use of radio
equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and distribution areas),
chemical plants, or where blasting operations are in progress.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not
always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats,
chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), areas where the air
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal
powders, and any other area where you would normally be
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
The intent of the HAC Act is to ensure reasonable access to
telecommunications services for persons with hearing
disabilities. While some wireless mobile devices are used near
some hearing devices (hearing aids and cochlear implants),
users may detect a buzzing, humming, or whining noise. Some
hearing devices are more immune than others to this
interference noise, and mobile devices also vary in the amount of
interference they generate.
The wireless telephone industry has developed a rating system
for wireless mobile devices to assist hearing device users find
mobile devices that may be compatible with their hearing
devices. Not all mobile devices have been rated. Mobile devices
that are rated have the rating on their box or a label located on
the box.
The ratings are not guarantees. Results will vary depending on
the user's hearing device and hearing loss. If your hearing device
happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to
Health and Safety Information
256
use a rated mobile device successfully. Trying out the mobile
device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for
your personal needs.
“Normal usage” in this context is defined as a signal quality that
is acceptable for normal operation. The M mark is intended to be
synonymous with the U mark. The T mark is intended to be
synonymous with the UT mark. The M and T marks are
recommended by the Alliance for Telecommunications Industries
Solutions (ATIS). The U and UT marks are referenced in Section
20.19 of the FCC Rules.
M-Ratings: Mobile devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC
requirements and are likely to generate less interference to
hearing devices than mobile devices that are not labeled. M4 is
the better/higher of the two ratings.
The HAC rating and measurement procedure are described in the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C63.19 standard.
T-Ratings: Mobile devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements
and are likely to generate less interference to hearing devices
than mobile devices that are not labeled. T4 is the better/higher
of the two ratings.
HAC/Wi-Fi for Newer Technologies
This phone has been tested and rated for use with hearing aids
for some of the wireless technologies that it uses. However, there
may be some newer wireless technologies used in this phone
that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is
important to try the different features of this phone thoroughly
and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear
implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult
your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for
information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions
about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider
or phone retailer.
Hearing devices may also be rated. Your hearing device
manufacturer or hearing health professional may help you find
this rating. Higher ratings mean that the hearing device is
relatively immune to interference noise. The hearing aid and
wireless mobile device rating values are then added together.
A sum of 5 is considered acceptable for normal use. A sum of 6
is considered for best use. If a hearing aid meets the M2 level
rating and the wireless mobile device meets the M3 level rating,
the sum of the two values equal M5. This is synonymous for T
ratings. This should provide the hearing aid user with “normal
usage” while using their hearing aid with the particular wireless
mobile device.
257
FCC Notice and Cautions
FCC Notice
The mobile device may cause TV or radio interference if used in
close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you
to stop using the mobile device if such interference cannot be
eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as
propane or butane) must comply with the National Fire Protection
Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy of this standard, contact the
National Fire Protection Association.
T3
+
T2
=
5
M3
+
M2
=
5
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Mobile Device
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with
it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the
mobile device, or make calls that increase your mobile device
bill.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not expressly
approved in this document could void your warranty for this
equipment and void your authority to operate this equipment.
Only use approved batteries, antennas, and chargers. The use of
any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the
mobile device warranty if said accessories cause damage or a
defect to the mobile device. Although your mobile device is quite
sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken.
Avoid dropping, hitting, bending, or sitting on it.
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out of
the reach of small children.
Health and Safety Information
258
•
•
If the phone, battery, charger or any accessory is not working properly,
take it to your nearest qualified service facility. The personnel there
will assist you, and if necessary, arrange for service.
Other Important Safety Information
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device or install the
mobile device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be
dangerous and may invalidate any warranty applicable to the device.
•
Dispose of phones in accordance with local regulations. In some areas,
the disposal of phones in household or business trash may be
prohibited. For safe disposal options for phones, contact your nearest
Samsung authorized service center.
•
•
•
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your
vehicle are securely mounted.
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials
in the same compartment as the mobile device, its parts, or
accessories.
•
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or
portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air bag or in
the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is improperly
installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result.
•
•
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use of
wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be dangerous to
the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate authorities before
using any function of a mobile device while on an aircraft.
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension or
denial of cell phone services to the offender, or legal action, or both.
259
Section 14: Warranty Information
Standard Limited Warranty
dents and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG; (c) defects or
damage resulting from excessive force or use of a metallic object when
pressing on a touch screen; (d) equipment that has the serial number or
the enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged, altered or
made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear; (f) defects or damage
resulting from the use of Product in conjunction or connection with
accessories, products, or ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or
approved by SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or adjustment not
furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (h) defects or damage resulting
from external causes such as collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt,
windstorm, lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source; (i) defects or
damage resulting from cellular signal reception or transmission, or
viruses or other software problems introduced into the Product; or (j)
Product used or purchased outside the United States. This Limited
Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of
rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not
cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger
not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any
of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or
(iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG
phone for which it is specified.
What is Covered and For How Long?
SAMSUNG TELECOMMUNICATIONS AMERICA, LLC ("SAMSUNG")
warrants that SAMSUNG's handsets and accessories
("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship
under normal use and service for the period commencing upon
the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser and
continuing for the following specified period of time after that
date:
Phone
1 Year
1 Year
90 Days
1 Year
Batteries
Case/Pouch/Holster
Other Phone Accessories
What is Not Covered?
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of the Product.
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting
from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper
storage, exposure to liquid, moisture, dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or
unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches,
Warranty Information
260
What are SAMSUNG's Obligations?
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this
Limited Warranty, you must pay all parts, shipping, and labor
charges for the repair or return of such Product.
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product is
returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited Warranty,
SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product, at SAMSUNG'S sole
option, without charge. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole
option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components
when repairing any Product, or may replace the Product with a
rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases,
pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90)
days. All other repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for
a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty
on the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is
longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. Except to
any extent expressly allowed by applicable law, transfer or
assignment of this Limited Warranty is prohibited.
You should keep a separate backup copy of any contents of the
Product before delivering the Product to SAMSUNG for warranty
service.
What Are The Limits On SAMSUNG’s liability?
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF SAMSUNG'S
RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING THE
PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR
FOR, WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT; LOSS OF
USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY, GOODWILL, PROFITS OR
SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE; INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
PUNITIVE DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND
DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
What must you do to obtain warranty service?
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, you must return
the Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate
container for shipping, accompanied by the sales receipt or
comparable proof of sale showing the original date of purchase,
the serial number of the Product and the seller's name and
address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product,
please call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-888-987-4357. If
261
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY,
CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH
THE PRODUCT, OR THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY
SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE. RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE
QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY
OF ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS SOLELY
WITH THE USER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT.
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION, AND
NOT BY A COURT OR JURY. Any such dispute shall not be
combined or consolidated with a dispute involving any other
person's or entity's Product or claim, and specifically, without
limitation of the foregoing, shall not under any circumstances
proceed as part of a class action. The arbitration shall be
conducted before a single arbitrator, whose award may not
exceed, in form or amount, the relief allowed by the applicable
law. The arbitration shall be conducted according to the
American Arbitration Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration
Rules applicable to consumer disputes. This arbitration provision
is entered pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of
the State of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws
principles, shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty
and all disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and application
of this arbitration provision and the Limited Warranty.
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be construed to
create an express warranty of any kind with respect to the Products. No
agent, employee, dealer, representative or reseller is authorized to
modify or extend this Limited Warranty or to make binding
representations or claims, whether in advertising, presentations or
otherwise, on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited
Warranty.
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also
have other rights that vary from state to state.
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims, exclusive
of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are $5,000.00 or less
("Small Claim"), the arbitrator may, if you prevail, award your
reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and costs as part
Warranty Information
262
of any award, but may not grant SAMSUNG its attorney fees,
expert witness fees or costs unless it is determined that the claim
was brought in bad faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be
required to pay no more than half of the total administrative,
facility and arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is
less, and SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees and
expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 ("Large Claim") shall be
determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim case, the
arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or apportion among
the parties, reasonable attorney fees, expert witness fees and
costs. Judgment may be entered on the arbitrator's award in any
court of competent jurisdiction.
number; and (d) the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if
you have it (the IMEI or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on
the Product box; (ii) on the Product information screen, which can
be found under "Settings;" (iii) on a label on the back of the
Product beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on
the outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no later
than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer
purchaser's purchase of the Product and providing the same
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting out
of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the coverage of
the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will continue to enjoy the
benefits of the Limited Warranty.
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against
SAMSUNG'S employees, representatives and affiliates if any
such claim arises from the Product's sale, condition or
performance.
Severability
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall not
affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited Warranty.
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by providing
notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days from the date of
the first consumer purchaser's purchase of the Product. To opt out,
you must send notice by e-mail to [email protected], with
the subject line: "Arbitration Opt Out." You must include in the opt
out e-mail (a) your name and address; (b) the date on which the
Product was purchased; (c) the Product model name or model
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC
1301 E. Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©
2011 Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC. All rights reserved.
263
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without
notice. [060111]
the Software available over a network where it could be used by
multiple computers at the same time. You may make one copy of
the Software in machine-readable form for backup purposes
only; provided that the backup copy must include all copyright or
other proprietary notices contained on the original.
End User License Agreement for Software
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License Agreement
("EULA") is a legal agreement between you (either an individual
or a single entity) and Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. for software
owned by Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated
companies and its third party suppliers and licensors that
accompanies this EULA, which includes computer software and
may include associated media, printed materials, "online" or
electronic documentation ("Software"). BY CLICKING THE "I
ACCEPT" BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS OR OTHERWISE DISABLE
THE "I ACCEPT", AND STILL INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD,
ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE
"DECLINE" BUTTON, AND DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung reserves
all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA. The Software
is protected by copyright and other intellectual property laws and
treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the title, copyright and
other intellectual property rights in the Software. The Software is
licensed, not sold.
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software (except
and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation), or modify, or
disable any features of, the Software, or create derivative works
based on the Software. You may not rent, lease, lend, sublicense
or provide commercial hosting services with the Software.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following rights
provided that you comply with all terms and conditions of this
EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run one copy of
the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other permanent storage
media of one computer and use the Software on a single
computer or a mobile device at a time, and you may not make
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and its
affiliates may collect and use technical information gathered as
part of the product support services related to the Software
provided to you, if any, related to the Software. Samsung may
use this information solely to improve its products or to provide
Warranty Information
264
customized services or technologies to you and will not disclose
this information in a form that personally identifies you.
apply to the Software, including the U.S. Export Administration
Regulations, as well as end user, end use, and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments.
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements and
add-on components (if any) of the Software that Samsung may
provide to you or make available to you after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the Software, unless we provide other terms
along with such upgrade. To use Software identified as an
upgrade, you must first be licensed for the Software identified by
Samsung as eligible for the upgrade. After upgrading, you may
no longer use the Software that formed the basis for your
upgrade eligibility.
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your
rights under this License will terminate automatically without
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the terms
and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this EULA, you
must cease all use of the Software and destroy all copies, full or
partial, of the Software.
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party applications
may be included with, or downloaded to this mobile device.
SAMSUNG makes no representations whatsoever about any of
these applications. Since SAMSUNG has no control over such
applications, Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or the
rights to the Software granted herein to any third party unless it
is in connection with the sale of the mobile device which the
Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer must include
all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and
printed materials, any upgrades, this EULA) and you may not
retain any copies of the Software. The transfer may not be an
indirect transfer, such as a consignment. Prior to the transfer, the
end user receiving the Software must agree to all the EULA
terms.
SAMSUNG is not responsible for the availability of such
applications and is not responsible or liable for any content,
advertising, products, services, or other materials on or available
from such applications. Purchaser expressly acknowledges and
agrees that use of third-party applications is at Purchaser's sole
risk and that the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to
Purchaser to take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser
selects to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan
horses, and other items of a destructive nature. References on
this mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the Software is
subject to export restrictions of various countries. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that
265
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to
Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,
sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the third-
party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees that
SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or indirectly,
for any damage or loss caused or alleged to caused by, or in
connection with, use of or reliance on any such third-party
content, products, or services available on or through any such
application. Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that your use
of any third-party application is governed by such third-party
application provider's Terms of Use, License Agreement, Privacy
Policy, or other such agreement and that any information or
personal data you provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to
such third-party application provider, will be subject to such
third-party application provider's privacy policy, if such a policy
exists. SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES OF
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.
PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
IS DONE AT PURCHASER'S OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND
PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGE TO
YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS FROM
THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER PURCHASER'S PERSONAL
INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER OR THE USE TO WHICH SUCH PERSONAL
INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION
PROVIDER. ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH
THIS MOBILE DEVICE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ON AN "AS
AVAILABLE" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST
EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW, SAMSUNG
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY OR
WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY, ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES,
QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS OR OTHER VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT
WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF
THE THRID-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS
10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party Applications.
SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR RELIABILITY OF,
OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR OTHERWISE RESPECTING,
THE CONTENT OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE
Warranty Information
266
CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET
PURCHASER'S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES THE
ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR, OR
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR INFORMATION,
WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY PURCHASER FROM
SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER THIS DISCLAIMER OF
WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS, OR TO
CREATE ANY WARRANTY.
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
NOTWITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG'S TOTAL
LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES, CAUSES
OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE BASED ON
CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT OF
PURCHASER'S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON THIS
MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS EULA,
SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION THAT
WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE FOREGOING
LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING
SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY
FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY THIRD-PARTY
APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO
ERRORS, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN
OPERATION OR TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO
CONNECT, NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
12. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Software is licensed
only with "restricted rights" and as "commercial items"
consisting of "commercial software" and "commercial software
documentation" with only those rights as are granted to all other
end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein.
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This EULA
shall not be governed by the UN Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME
267
excluded. If a dispute, controversy or difference is not amicably
settled, it shall be finally resolved by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in
accordance with the Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial
Arbitration Board. The award of arbitration shall be final and
binding upon the parties.
Important!: Please provide warranty information (proof of purchase) to
Samsung’s Customer Care Center in order to provide this service
at no charge. If the warranty has expired on the device, charges
may apply.
Customer Care Center:
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the entire
agreement between you and Samsung relating to the Software
and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral or written
communications, proposals and representations with respect to
the Software or any other subject matter covered by this EULA. If
any provision of this EULA is held to be void, invalid,
unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions shall continue in full
force and effect.
1000 Klein Rd.
Plano, TX 75074
Toll Free Tel: 1.888.987.HELP (4357)
Samsung Telecommunications America, LLC:
1301 East Lookout Drive
Richardson, Texas 75082
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal
Important!: If you are using a handset other than a standard numeric keypad,
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using the
standard methods, the data only appears to be removed on a
superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to retrieve
and reuse the data by means of special software.
dial the numbers listed in brackets.
Phone: 1-888-987-HELP (4357)
©
2011 Samsung Telecommunications America. All rights
reserved.
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of this
sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to Samsung’s
Customer Care Center for an Extended File System (EFS) Clear
which will eliminate all user memory and return all settings to
default settings. Please contact the Samsung Customer Care
Center for details.
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written
approval. Specifications and availability subject to change
without notice.
Warranty Information
268
Index
Alarm
Setting 199
Turning Off 200
Alarm Tone
Set as 145
AllShare
Configuring Settings 149
Transmitting Media 150
Answer Vibration 211
Answering a call 57
Answering Key 211
Application cache and data
Clearing 161
Application Menus
Applications 37
411 & More 38
Asphalt 38
Blio 38
Calendar 39
Numerics
2G Network
Using 209
3 Sec Pause
Adding 57
Using 209
411 & More 148
Using 209
Clock 39
Contacts 39
Downloads 39
Files 40
A
Gallery 40
Accessing
IM 40
Latitude 40
Lookout 41
Recently-used applications 37
Accounts 148
Adding Contacts 99
Add to Favorites 104
Adjusting
AllShare 38
Media Hub 41
269
Messaging 41
messaging 163
More for Me 41
My Device 42
Navigation 42
Netflix 42
News & Weather 42
Photo Editor 42
Places 42
Video Chat 44
Video Player 178
Videos 44
Visual Voicemail 45
Battery
Charging 11
Installing 10
Low Battery Indicator 12
Removal 10
Saving Power 13
Wall Charger 11
Battery Cover
Removal 7
Zinio Reader 45
Polaris Office 43
Pro Apps 43
Applications and Development 148
Replace 8
Settings 43
Slacker 43
Social Hub 43
Tags 44
Task 44
Task Manager 44
T-Mobile Mall 43
T-Mobile Name ID 43
T-Mobile TV 43
Using the Camcorder 129
Using the Camera 122
Utility 44
Auto Reject
Configuration 58
Auto Reject List 211
Auto-sync
Battery Life
Extending 13
Battery Usage 226
Bing
Blacklist 72
Adding 93
Blio 150
Bluetooth 205
About 187
Enabling 227
B
Back up
Activation 205
270
Device Name 205
Disable 187
Disconnecting a Paired Device 189
Enable 187
Sending Contacts Via 189
Entering a URL 182
Navigation 182
Options 182
Settings 185
Ending via Status Bar 55
Redialing the last number 61
Wait dialing 61
General 211
Bubble
Options 108
C
Call Volume
Adjusting 66
Calculator
Calendar 198
Creating an event 198
Settings 198
Settings 187
Status indicators 187
Turning on and off 187
Visibility 205
Bonus Apps 150
Books 151
Browser
Caller Ringtone
Calling
Calls
Making a 54
Multi-party 68
Muting 67
Call Alert 211
Call Answering/Ending 211
Configuring 212
Answering 57
Camcorder 129
Options 130
Adding bookmarks 184
Ending 55
271
Shooting Video 129
Camera 122
Contacts
Adding a Number to Existing 91
Cookies
Emptying 185
Camera Options 123
Taking Pictures 122
Care and Maintenance 252
Charging battery 11
Clearing
Application cache and data 161
Configuration
Initial 14
Adding Your Facebook Friends 99
Additional Options 101
Deleting 91
Displaying Contacts by Name 98
Filtering 99
Copying Contact 97
Corporate Email
Account Syncronization 229
Add Account 229
Creating a Playlist 145
Creating and sending
Messages 105
Customizing
Connections
Contact
Copying to microSD Card 97
Copying to SIM Card 97
Creating a New 87
Joining 94
New From Keypad 88
Contact Entry
Options 93
Contact List
Options 92
Contact Menus
Groups 102
Sending 96
Setting Default Location 92
Settings 101
D
Activate/Deactivate 208
Deleting
Message Thread 109
Multiple messages 109
Single message 109
Desk Clock
Configuring 201
Display
Navigation 37
Using 37
Icons 23
Settings 23
Options 93
272
Sending 101
Making 55
Display / Touch-Screen 249
Displaying your phone number 54
DivX
Overview 135
Registering Your DivX Device 135
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?
Downloading
Downloads 153
Internet Downloads 153
E
Email 111
Factory data reset 53
Favorites Tab 104
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
Regulations for Wireless Devices 256
FCC Notice and Cautions 258
Folder
Creating and Managing 50
Deleting 50
Renaming 50
Font
Style 217
Without SIM 56
Emoticons 106
Ending
A call 55
Using SWYPE 76
Erasing files from
Memory card 53
Event Notifications 217
Account Setup 115
Composing 116
Configuring Settings 117
Deleting Message 117
Opening 116
Font Size
Caption 180
Friends
Viewing 92
Composing 113
Refreshing Messages 116
F
G
Creating an Internet Account 112
Opening 113
Gallery
Folder Options 127
Opening 134
Facebook
273
Getting Started 6
Battery 10
Battery Cover 7
Google mail
H
Health and Safety Information 239
Hold
Locking/Unlocking the Device 15
microSD card 9
SIM Card 8
Voice Mail 16
see also Gmail 119
Google Maps
Home 31
Home Key 28
Home Screen
Overview 31
Wallpaper 217
Home screens
Customizing 46
I
Enabling a location source 158
Opening a map 158
GPS & AGPS 250
Composing a message 119
Creating and Additional Account
Groups
Adding an Member to an Existing
Group 102
Opening 119
Refreshing 119
Signing In 118
Viewing 119
Deleting 103
Removing an Entry 102
Settings 103
GSM 209
Gyroscope
Icons
Description 23
Indicator 23
Status 23
Google
Account Management Settings 228
Account Syncronization 228
Add Account 228
Adding a Sync Account 228
Create New Account 15
Merge Contacts 92
Retrieving Password 16
Set Search Engine 186
Images
Assigning as a Contact icon 129
274
Importing and Exporting
To SIM card 101
In call
Incoming Call Volume
Setting 215
Indicator icons 23
International Call 60
International Calls
Making 60
Internet 181
Search 183
Internet Downloads 153
Internet Email 111
ISIM
Uninstalling Third-party Applications
Market 159
Marking contact
As a default 95
Creating a New Account 137
Using 137
Media Volume
Setting 215
Memo
Options 162
L
LinkedIn
Adding Contacts From 99
Live Wallpapers 217
Lock Screen
Clock Position 217
Viewing Missed Calls 74
Wallpaper 217
Logs 70
Accessing 71
Altering Numbers 73
Erasing 73
Memory card
Merge Calls 68
Merge with Google 92
Message
Options 106
Read 107
Reply 108
Threads 107
Low battery indicator 12
M
Making
Overview 8
Emergency Calls 55
International Calls 60
Managing Applications 224
Clearing Application Cache 224
Moving Third-party Applications to
Card 225
J
Joining
Contact information 94
K
Kies Air
Before Using 191
275
Message Search 109
Message threads 107
Messaging
Creating and sending 105
Creating and Sending Text
Messages 105
Deleting a message 109
Google Mail 118
Icons on the Status Bar 105
Insert Smiley 106
Options 106
Missed Call
Mobile Networks 208
Entering Text in the Mobile Web
Player 143
Playing Music 143
Removing Music 146
Music App
Adding Songs to Playlists 143
Changing Library View 139
Changing Settings 140
Creating a Playlist 143
Listening 140
Playing 140
Browser 182
Navigating with the Mobile Web 182
Using Bookmarks 183
Motion Settings 229
Mounting the SD card 52
Multi-Party Call 68
Multi-party call
Settings 109
Signing into Google Mail 118
Text Templates 111
Types of Messages 105
Viewing new 107
microSD Card
Registration 139
Insertion 9
Removal 10
Music 165
Tab Options 141
Music Files
Removing 146
Transferring 146
Mini Diary
Adding Music 145
Deleting an entry 164
Options 164
Settings 164
Options 144
276
Notification Volume
Setting 215
Phone Ringtone 215
Photos
Polaris Office 171
Power Control 13
Power Saving
N
Namecard
Send Via 96
Sending 96
Navigating
O
Organizer
Application Menus 36
Sub-Menus 36
Calculator 151
Other Downloads 153
Other Important Safety Information 259
Outlook 111
Synchronizing 229
Overview
Netflix 169
Network connection
Network Mode
Activate 219
Power Savings 13
Predictive Text
Predictive text
P
New applications
Downloading 160
News & Weather 170
NFC
Pause Dialing 60
People
Phone
Icons 23
NFC (Near Field Communication) 208
Noise Reduction 68
Non-Market Applications 161
Using 27
Phone number
Finding 54
Primary Shortcuts 33
Adding and Deleting 47
Proximity Sensor
Activation 211
277
Ringtone
Phone 215
Screens
Customizing 46
Rearranging 47
SD card
Disconnect Storage 52
Mounting the 52
Unmounting 53
Search Engine 186
Set as
Contact icon 127
Home Screen Wallpaper 127
Lock Screen Wallpaper 127
Setting an alarm 199
Setting up
Q
Quick Dialing 54
Quick Messaging 106
S
R
Samsung Keyboard
Settings 233
Recently-used Applications
Accessing 37
Redialing the last number 61
Reducing Exposure
Hands-Free Kits and Other
Accessories 242
Changing the Input Type 82
Enabling 81
Reject Call
SAR Certification Information 243
Save a Number
Screen
Home 31
Navigation 34
Screen Lock
Changing 221
Screen Rotation
Rejection Messages 211
Reject Calls
Managing 58
Adding 93
Rejection List
Assigning Multiple Numbers 58
Assigning Single Numbers 58
Rejection Messages 211
Reset 231
Responsible Listening 253
Restore 230
Voicemail 16
Settings 202
Browser 185
Contact list 101
Display 23
Enabling the GPS Satellites 220
Restricting Children's Access to Your
Auto-Rotate 217
278
Enabling wireless network locations
Smart Practices While Driving 245
Snooze 200
SNS 99
Switching to a Bluetooth
During a call 67
SWYPE
Messaging 109
Mini Diary 164
SNS Friends
Viewing 92
123ABC Mode 79
Swype
Setup
Initial 14
Shortcuts
Social Network
Adding Facebook Contacts 99
Resync 100
Help 233
Adding from Application Screen 48
Social Networking
Adding Contacts From 99
Song
Set as 145
Speakerphone
Tutorial 233
Sync Books 228
System Volume
Setting 215
Adding from Home Screen 48
Managing 47
Primary 33
SIM Card
Changing Exisitng PIN 222
Importing and Exporting 101
Insertion 8
Lock 222
Removal 9
Turning on and off 67
Speed Dial
T
Making a call 63
Removing an entry 63
Setting up entries 62
Standard Limited Warranty 260
Sub-Menus
Navigation 36
Tags 174
Task 174
Activating 196
Disconnecting 196
Text Input
Methods 75
Text Input Method
Selecting 75
SIM Card Lock
279
Text Templates 111
Create Your Own 111
Text To Speech 235
Text-to-speech
Configuration 235
Third-Party Applications 225
Uninstalling 162
Time Management
Calendar 198
T-Mobile Contacts Backup 87
T-Mobile Mall 173
Tools
Camera 122
Transferring Music Files 146
TTS 235
Home 31
Uninstalling
Third-party applications 162
Unmounting
Usage
Battery 226
Memory 226
V
Vibration 215
Intensity 216
Setup 215
Settings 177
Videos
Options 126
Using 58
Voice Input Recognition 235
Voice mail
USB
USB Connections
USB Settings
Use Packet Data 208
Using Favorites
Accessing 17
TTY Mode 212
Twitter
Accessing from another phone 17
Setting up 16
Voicemail 214
Volume Settings
Adjusting 215
VPN
Adding 207
U
Understanding Your Phone 19
Back View 22
Adding Favorites 184
Display 22
Features 19
Settings 206
Front View 20
280
Advanced settings 195
Calling 63
Deactivating 195
Settings 202
Status icons 195
Wi-Fi Calling 8
Icons 65
WPA2 PSK 197
W
Y
Wait 61
Wait dialing 61
Wallpapers
Changing 50
Managing 50
Yahoo! 186
Yahoo! Mail
Adding Contacts From 99
YouTube
Settings 180
Warranty Information 260
WCDMA 209
Web 181
History 185
Video Chat 177
Z
Web applications
Widget
Widgets
Zinio Reader 180
Launching 65
Wi-Fi Hotspot 196
Activating 196
Connecting 197
Securing 197
Windows Live Hotmail
Adding Contacts From 99
World Clock
Adding and Removing 49
Mini Diary 41
Stopwatch 201
Wi-Fi
DST Settings 201
About 193
281
|